Model WS Slant Wall Housing Aluminum Wall Shutters

Model WS Slant Wall Housing Aluminum Wall Shutters
Personal Attention To Quality
• When ordered with square or slantwall housing,
• All fans are test run and inspected before released
fans are shipped completely assembled and ready
for shipment as further assurance of the superior
to install and wire. Propellers are precision balquality of Acme products
anced for a smooth, quiet performance
Model WS Slant Wall Housing
DCA Series (Aluminum)
Acme super windmaster fans
• All-aluminum orifice and propeller
• Heavy-duty steel structural frame triple protected with iron phosphate
baked-on epoxy primer and baked-on Acrylic Epoxy Finish
• Stainless steel fasteners are used throughout to bolt structural frame
to aluminum orifices
• Fan is mounted in galvanized wall housing ready to install and wire
DC Series (Steel)
• Rugged, all-welded heavy-duty steel construction. No bolts or rivets
to work loose. Propeller is safely locked to heavy steel shaft
• Triple-protected against rust with iron phosphate process,
baked-on epoxy primer and baked-on Acrylic Epoxy Finish
• When optional housings are ordered, fans are mounted in
galvanized housing ready to install and wire
Aluminum
Wall Shutters
• To keep out wind, rain and backdrafts when fan
is not in operation
• Precision counterbalanced aluminum blades
open easier, wider to permit higher fan capacity
• Nylon bearings throughout are corrosion proof
to help prevent sticking
• Suitable for dusty or humid applications
• Corrosion resistant heavy gauge aluminum
frame
• Motor draws only 17 watts
• Stainless steel hinge pins will not rust, ensuring
easy positive blade action
410
800-325-3055
• All shutter blades are reinforced with polished
galvanized steel rods and equipped with
double tie-rods
• Automatic type used with exhaust fans;
opens automatically when fan is on, closes
automatically when fan is off
• Opened with heavy duty damper motors;
spring closed
• WAAC models are center pivoted to open easier
against static pressures
www.hummert.com
Aluminum Windmaster Price List
PRICES INCLUDE FAN ASSEMBLED IN SLANT HOUSING & GUARDS
PRICES FOR ALUMINUM HOUSING AVAILABLE ON REQUEST
ORDER AUTOMATIC
SHUTTERS SEPARATELY
T wo S peed
O ne SAluminum
peed
Automatic Shutters
CFM Slant
115V/230VCFM Slant
115V
230V
Fan HousingFanCatalogPC-1PC-2
HousingFanCatalogCatalogPC-1PC-2
Wt/PC-1 = 1-4
Size HP .05”
ModelNumber
1-4
5 & Up
.05”
Model
NumberNumber
1-4
5 & UpLbsPC-2 = 5 & Up
24” 1⁄4
4580 DCA24E 28-1800-
$ —
$ — 4122 DCA24E-2S 28-1803-
—
$ —
$ — 104
WAA2727
9 lbs
24” 1⁄3
4966
DCA24F 28-1805-
—
— 4999 DCA24F-2S 28-1808-
—
—
— 110
28-0625-1
$—
24” 1⁄2 5484 DCA24G28-1810-
—
— 5064 DCA24G-2S 28-1813-28-1814-
—
— 114 28-0625-2
—
3
24” ⁄4
6793 DCA24H28-1815-
—
— 6227 DCA24H-2S 28-1818-28-1819-
—
— 119
30” 1⁄36662DCA30F
28-1820- — —5995DCA30F-2S
28-1823- —
—
—
123WAA3333 13 lbs
30” 1⁄2
8304 DCA30G 28-1825-
—
— 7393 DCA30G-2S 28-1828- 28-1829-
—
— 127
28-0631-1
$—
30” 3⁄4
9092 DCA30H28-1830-
—
— 8529 DCA30H-2S 28-1833-28-1834-
—
— 132 28-0631-2
—
36” 1⁄38526DCA36F
28-1835- — —7673DCA36F-2S
28-1838- —
—
—
156WAA3939 17 lbs
36” 1⁄2
9972 DCA36G 28-1840-
—
— 9234 DCA36G-2S 28-1843- 28-1844-
—
— 160
28-0637-1
$—
36” 3⁄4 11852 DCA36H28-1845-
—
— 10396 DCA36H-2S 28-1848-28-1849-
—
— 165 28-0637-2
—
36”1 12753 DCA36J28-1850-
—
— 12753 DCA36J-2S
— 28-1851
—
— 173
42” 1⁄2 12888 DCA42G 28-1853-
—
— 11741 DCA42G-2S 28-1856- 28-1857-
—
— 184
WAA4545
25 lbs
42” 3⁄4 14819 DCA42H 28-1858-
—
— 13720 DCA42H-2S 28-1861- 28-1862-
—
— 210
28-0643-1
$—
42” 1 16108 DCA42J 28-1863-
—
— 16108 DCA42J-2S
—
28-1864-
—
— 201
28-0643-2
—
48” 1⁄2 14828 DCA48G 28-1866-
—
— 12929 DCA48G-2S 28-1869- 28-1870-
—
— 260
WAA5454
35 lbs
48” 3⁄4 17512 DCA48H 28-1871-
—
— 15217 DCA48H-2S 28-1874- 28-1875-
—
— 285
28-0649-1
$—
48” 1 18777 DCA48J 28-1876-
—
— 18777 DCA48J-2S
—
28-1873-
—
— 293 28-0649-2
—
54” 1 23124 DCA54J 28-1877-
—
— 23124 DCA54J-2S
—
28-1880-
—
— 342
WAA6060
40 lbs
54” 11⁄2
25629
DCA54K
28-1878-——
— — —— ——
350
28-0655-1$ —
28-0655-2—
Steel Windmaster Price List
28-1980-1 Model BT Belt Tightener - DC/DCA
28-0590-1 125292 Shaft-bearing assembly
28-0595-1 991005 Bearing only for assembly
Specifications:
Fan
Size
12”
16”
18”
24”
30”
36”
42”
48”
54”
Wall
Housing
Model
Wt
WS12FQ 20
WS16FQ
23
WS18FN
28
WS24DC
35
WS30DC
42
WS36DC
46
WS42DC
53
WS48DC
78
WS54DC 106
PRICES INCLUDE FAN ASSEMBLED IN SLANT HOUSING & GUARDS
Aluminum
T wo S peed
Automatic Shutters
CFM Slant
115V
230V
Fan HousingFanCatalogCatalogPC-1PC-2 Wt/PC-1 = 1-4
Size HP
.05”
Model
NumberNumber
1-4
5 & UpLbsPC-2 = 5 & Up
24” 1⁄4
4455 DC24E-2S 28-1604- —
$ —
$ — 110 WAA2727
9 lbs
24” 1⁄3 4706 DC24F-2S28-1609- —
—
— 116 28-0625-1
$—
24” 1⁄2 5406 DC24G-2S28-1614-28-1615-
—
— 116 28-0625-2—
24” 3⁄4 6295 DC24H-2S 28-1619-28-1620-
—
— 123
30” 1⁄3 6369 DC30F-2S28-1624- —
—
— 131 WAA3333
13 lbs
30” 1⁄2 7397 DC30G-2S 28-1629-28-1630-
—
— 135 28-0631-1
$—
30” 3⁄4 8720 DC30H-2S28-1634- —
—
— 140 28-0631-2—
36” 1⁄3 8019 DC36F-2S 28-1639- —
—
— 166 WAA3939
17 lbs
36” 1⁄2 9630 DC36G-2S 28-1644-28-1645-
—
— 170 28-0637-1
$—
36” 3⁄4 10418 DC36H-2S 28-1649-28-1650-
—
— 175 28-0637-2
—
36” 1 12956 DC36J-2S — 28-1652-
—
— 183
42” 1⁄2 11017 DC42G-2S 28-1657-28-1658-
—
— 184 WAA4545
25 lbs
42” 3⁄4 13036 DC42H-2S 28-1662-28-1663-
—
— 205 28-0643-1
$—
42” 1 15621 DC42J-2S — 28-1665-
—
— 213 28-0643-2
—
48” 1⁄2 13002 DC48G-2S 28-1670-28-1671-
—
— 288 WAA5454
35 lbs
48” 3⁄4 15001 DC48H-2S 28-1675-28-1676-
—
— 297 28-0649-1
$—
48” 1 19041 DC48J-2S — 28-1678-
—
— 305 28-0649-2
—
54” 1 22888 DC54J-2S — 28-1682-
—
— 342 WAA6060
40 lbs
—
—
— — —— ——
350
28-0655-1 $ —
—
—
— — —— ——
350
28-0655-2 —
Acme super windmaster fans
O ne S peed
CFM Slant
115V/230V
Fan HousingFanCatalogPC-1PC-2
Size HP .05” ModelNumber
1-4
5 & Up
24” 1⁄4 4950
DC24E 28-1601-
$ —
$—
24” 1⁄3 5229 DC24F28-1606-
—
—
24” 1⁄2 5847 DC24G28-1611-
—
—
24” 3⁄4 6859 DC24H28-1616-
—
—
30” 1⁄3 7077 DC30F28-1621-
—
—
30” 1⁄2 8295 DC30G28-1626-
—
—
30” 3⁄4 9172 DC30H28-1631-
—
—
36” 1⁄3 8910 DC36F28-1636-
—
—
36” 1⁄2 10432 DC36G28-1641-
—
—
36” 3⁄4 12005 DC36H28-1646-
—
—
36” 1 12956 DC36J 28-1651-
—
—
42” 1⁄2 12107 DC42G28-1654-
—
—
42” 3⁄4 14070 DC42H28-1659-
—
—
42” 1 15621 DC42J 28-1664-
—
—
48” 1⁄2 14831 DC48G28-1667-
—
—
48” 3⁄4 17840 DC48H28-1672-
—
—
48” 1 19041 DC48J 28-1677-
—
—
48” 11⁄221950 DC48K28-1679-
—
—
54” 1 22888 DC54J 28-1680-
—
—
54” 11⁄225100 DC54K28-1683-
—
—
$ —
—
—
28-0596-1 991220 Neoprene rings
28-0597-1 181166 Bearing cap
28-0598-1 121117 Shaft
Automatic Shutter
Inlet
Guard
Aluminum
Model
Wt
Model
Wt
WAA1515
4 GS12
4
WAA2020
8
GS16
4
WAA2222
8
GS18
5
WAA2727
7
GS24
5
WAA3333
10
GS30
7
WAA3939
15
GS36
10
WAA4545
18
GS42
12
WAA5454
24
GS48
15
WAA6060
28
GS54
18
Inside Framed
Opening Dimensions
A
B
C
16-3 ⁄4”18”
24”
21-3 ⁄4” 23-1⁄4” 27”
23-3 ⁄4” 25-1⁄4” 24”
28-3 ⁄4” 30-3 ⁄4” 29”
34-3 ⁄4” 36-1⁄2” 31”
40-3 ⁄4” 42-3 ⁄4” 31”
46-3 ⁄4” 49”
33”
54-3 ⁄4” 57-1⁄4” 39”
60-3 ⁄4” 63-1⁄2” 40”
SHIPPED FOB:
800-325-3055
—
—
—
Oklahoma
www.hummert.com
411
DIRECT DRIVE
AUTOMATIC
SHUTTER
(OPTIONAL)
• Smart streamlined construction includes back
guard (motor side) as standard equipment when
ordered without wall housing
• Front guards (propeller side) also available
• Available with galvanized steel wall housing.
• Aluminum propeller, epoxy painted steel orifice
• Totally enclosed motor with ball bearings
• Variable speed with solid state control
Certified CFM vs
Cert
FanFan Static Pressure
Max Ship
Size Model*RPM HP 0 .100 .125BHP**Wt
12” FQ129
1550 1/9
1380
1280 1245 .105
44
16” FQ16C6
1160 1/8
2180
2020 1960 .148
56
18” FN18E4 1760 1/4 3430 3165 3090 .300 124
Fan
Side
12”
16”
18”
AxB
FAN
OUTLET
GUARD
(STANDARD)
FAN INLET
GUARD
(OPTIONAL)
Wall Housing
Model Wt
GS12FQ 15
GS16FQ 18
GS18FN 22
Shutter
Inlet Guard
Dimensions
Model Wt Model Wt A Width B Height
WAA17 4
GS12
6 16-1/4”
18”
WAA22 8
GS16
8 21-1/4”
23”
WAA22 8 GS18 10 23-1/4”
25”
* When used with a 2-speed switch, speed reduction is approximately 30% for low speed. Performances shown are for units without ducts.
**BHP does not include drive losses.
Fan 1) Fan
Catalog
PC-1
PC-2
2) Inlet
Catalog
PC-1
PC-2
Alum Auto Catalog
PC-1
PC-2
Size
Model
Number
1-4
5 & Up
Guard
Number
1-4
5 & Up
Shutter
Number
1-4
5 & Up
12”FQ12928-3105- $ —$ —GS12FQ28-3130-
$ —$ — WAA1728-3107- $ —$ —
16” FQ16C6 28-3201-
—
— GS16FQ28-3230-
—
— WAA2228-3242-
—
—
18” FN18E4 28-3240-
—
— GS18FN28-3243-
—
— WAA2228-3242-
—
—
Acme fans, dampers & louvers
1)Fan has 2-speed, T.E. motor 115/160. Price includes fan, slant housing and outlet guard.
2)Front inlet guard is optional.
SHIPPED FOB:
Oklahoma
Rugged Plastic
Direct Drive Fans
• Housing - Heavy gauge plastic and fiberglass
provides strength and corrosion resistance
while being easy to clean 14” thru 24” fans have
plastic housing and diffuser. The slant design on
DDPG and DDPS models improves performance
and assists run-off condensation
• Propeller - Direct drive DDPS fan sizes 14” thru
24” feature stainless steel cambered twist blades
riveted through the center eliminating stress
• Motor - High efficiency motors are totally
enclosed with shielded ball bearings for
protection from the environment
• Frame - Stainless steel provides a strong vertical
support that aligns the propeller centered in the
orifice for maximum performance
• Shutter - Unique design
lowers resistance with
preventing back drafts
Available in aluminum
or plastic
• Air Diffuser - Originally
designed and introduced by Acme in 1979 in the
Master-Ex line. Published performance for DDP
and DDPS includes diffuser for accurate data not estimated percentages
• Variable Speed - All direct drives are suitable for
variable speed with proper controller
• Front Guard - Heavy gauge and coated to
prevent corrosion
DDP Shutter
• All alluminum construction
• Counter balanced blades
• Nylon bearing
• Stainless steel hinge pins
• Low air resistance
• Reduces sticking in dusty and
moist conditions
Aluminum
Fan
Fan
Catalog
PC-1PC-2Shutter
Catalog
PC-1
PC-2
Size Model
HP CFM RPM C/W Wt Number
1-5
6 & Up
Model
Wt Number 1-5 6 & Up
14” DDPS14D4-C* 1/5 2020 1638 8.5 35 28-1300-
$ —
$ —
ARW2021 6 28-1150-
$ —
$—
18” DDPS18F4-C 1/3 40001632 10.4 38 28-1304-
—
— ARW2627 728-1152-
—
—
24” DDPS24G6-C*1/2 6900 1091 13 90 28-1308-
—
— ARW3234 1028-1154-
—
—
Fan
Catalog Size Description
Wt Number
14” DDP14 Inlet Guard 1/2” x 1” mesh
1 28-1302-
18” DDP18 Inlet Guard 1/2” x 1” mesh
2 28-1306-
24” DDP24 Inlet Guard 1/2” x 1” mesh
3 28-1310-
412
800-325-3055
PC-1 1-5
$ —
—
—
PC-2
6 & Up
$—
—
—
We Appreciate
Your Business
Thank You!
www.hummert.com
Motorized Aluminum Wall Shutters
• Corrosion resistant heavy gauge aluminum frame
• Precision counter balanced aluminum blades open easier, wider to
permit higher fan capacity
• Nylon bearings throughout are corrosion proof to help prevent
sticking. Suitable for dusty or humid applications
• Stainless steel hinge pins will not rust, insure easy positive blade
action
• All shutter blades are reinforced with polished galvanized steel rods,
and equipped with double tie-rods
• Automatic - Used with exhaust fans; opens automatically when fan
is on, closes automatically when fan is off
• Keeps out wind, rain and backdrafts when fan is not in operation
• New cam pulley operator provides long life to motor-corrosion
resistance
Dimensions
• Motor draws only 17 watts
Shutter
Sq Ft
• WAAC models are center pivoted to open easier
Model No
Wt Overall Opening Opening
against house static pressures
Single Panel Shutters
• Motors are available in 24v, 115v, 230v, 460v
WAAC1818MT 10 18 x18 15x15
1.56
(specify voltage required)
WAAC2626MT 14 26 x 26 23x23
3.67
WAAC3333MT 18 33 x33 30 x30
6.25
WAAC4040MT 22 40 x40 37x37
9.50
— Are you —
WAAC5151MT 28 51 x51 48 x48 16.00
Double Panel Shutters
6.25
WAAC6318MT 19 63 x18 60x15
WAAC6326MT 25 63 x26 60x 23
9.58
WAAC6340MT 35 63 x40 60x37 15.42
WAAC6362MT 52 63 x62 60 x 59 24.58
We can design a plan for you
planning to build?
Call our Greenhouse Department!
Motorized Inlet Shutters, 115V
Catalog
PC-1
PC-2
Number
1-4
5 & Up
28-1115-
28-1123-
28-1130-
28-1137-
28-1145-
$ —
—
—
—
—
$—
—
—
—
—
28-1138-
28-1141-
28-1139-
28-1140-
$ —
Call
—
—
$—
Call
—
—
MKCAM Motor & Linkage Kits for WAAC Shutters
Includes motor, mounting bracket, cam assembly, retainer spring and hardware
Single Panel Shutters
Model
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
NumberDescription Number
1-4
5 & up
MKCAM-C-24 24 Volt Motor & Linkage 28-3781-
$ —
$—
MKCAM-C-115
115 Volt Motor & Linkage 28-3782-
—
—
MKCAM-C-230 230 Volt Motor & Linkage 28-3784-
—
—
Double Panel Shutters
MKCAM-C-HD-24 24 Volt Motor & Linkage 28-3778-
$ —
$—
MKCAM-C-HD-115 115 Volt Motor & Linkage 28-3779-
—
—
MKCAM-C-HD-230 230 Volt Motor & Linkage 28-3780-
—
—
SHIPPED FOB: Oklahoma
Shutter Motor only
for Single and Double Panel Shutters
Single Panel Shutters
ModelCatalog #PC-1PC-2
NumberVoltageNumber
1-4
5 & up
697469 24 Volt 28-3760-
$ —
$—
697470 115 Volt 28-3761-
—
—
697471 200 Volt 28-3762-
—
—
697472 230 Volt 28-3763-
—
—
Double Panel Shutters
697473 24 Volt 28-3754-
$ —
$—
697474 115 Volt 28-3755-
—
—
697475 200 Volt 28-3756-
—
—
697476 230 Volt 28-3757-
—
—
IN STOCK FOR IMMEDIATE SHIPMENT FROM OUR ST. LOUIS WAREHOUSE
Motor Only (115 Volt)
MKCAM Linkage Only
Shaft Catalog PC-1 Model Description
Type Number
1-4
697470 Single Panel Square 28-3750-
$ —
697474 Double Panel Semi Rd 28-3749-
—
Single Panel
(Square Shaft) 
Motor
800-325-3055
PC-2
5 & Up
$—
—
Shaft Catalog PC-1 Model Description
Type Number
1-4
316673 Single Panel Square 28-3751-
$ —
316029 Double Panel Semi Rd 28-3752-
—
PC-2
5 & Up
$—
—
Single Panel
(Square Shaft) 
MKCAM Linkage
Double Panel
(Semi-Round Shaft) 
Motor
Double Panel
(Semi-Round Shaft) 
MKCAM Linkage
www.hummert.com
413
Acme aluminum wall shutters
NOTE: ABOVE PRICES INCLUDE MKCAM-3 MOTORIZING KITS, BOXED & SHIPPED SEPARATELY
Exhaust Fans
NBF Powder Coated Steel
Exhaust Fans
MAL – Aluminum Exhaust Fans
The answer to concerns about rust and
corrosion
in today’s
Fan Model
A dampBgreenhouse
C
D
environment. Combined with an aluminum wall
32
5-1/8
12-1/2
5
NBF/AL24
housing, aluminum shutter, and a vinyl coated
38 guards,
5-1/8the 12-1/2
5-1/8
wire NBF/AL30
inlet and outlet
AL fan will
provide years of trouble-free and corrosion44
5-1/8
13-1/4
5-1/4
NBF/AL36
free service. AL fans feature all-welded angle
frameNBF/AL42
construction50for a rugged
and durable
5-1/8
13-1/4
5-7/8
unit. The fan panel has a deep spun orifice for
56
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/4
NBF/AL48
maximum efficiency. AL fans utilize Coolair’s
exclusive
drive assembly
for over
80 years.
62
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/2The
NBFA/AL54
die-formed aluminum blades are bolted to a
68
6-1/8
18
6
NBF60
cast aluminum hub, which also serves as the
fan pulley. Power is applied through V-belts
A
B
D
directly
toC the propeller
with the blade load
concentrated
over the fan bearings,
5-1/8
12-1/2 directly
5
thus eliminating overhung bearing load. AL
5-1/8
5-1/8
fans are12-1/2
available
with single or two-speed
totally enclosed
motors.
5-1/8
13-1/4
5-1/4
A
32
38
44
Size
E
F
C
FRONT VIEW
C
B
G
H
J
32-11/16
C
38-3/4
12-1/2
44-13/16
23-7/8
D
23
5
22-1/2
29 1/16
29 1/16 FLOW
29 9/16
12-1/2
50-15/16
5-1/8
21-3/4
29-11/16
2
A
5-1/8 2413-1/432-3/8
5-7/837-11/16
Fan Model
A
B
38-3/8
30
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/4 44-1/2
32
5-1/8
NBF/AL24
44-3/8
50-5/16
36
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/2
38
5-1/8
NBF/AL30
50-3/8
56-5/16
42
6-1/8
18
6
56-3/8
62-3/8
48
44
5-1/8
NBF/AL36
50
56
62
/8
/8
/8
/8
American Coolair exhaust fans
68
AIR
FRONT VIEW
57
21-5/8
13-1/4
5-1/4
F
44
NBF/AL36
37-11/16
32-11/16
23-7/8
29 1/16
50
NBF/AL42
4
30-1/2
2
5-1/8
13-1/4
E5-1/4
5-1/8
13-1/4
5-7/8
38-3/4
23
29 1/16
56
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/4
NBFA/AL54
62
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/2
NBF60
68
6-1/8
18
6
NBF/AL48
AIR C
FLOW
A
2
FRONT VIEW
Size
E
F
J
FRONT VIEW
L A
30 68
6-1/8
38-3/8
/8
23
6
50-5/16
44-13/16
22-1/2
44-3/8
E 42
50-3/8
F
56-5/16
G
50-15/16
H
L
21-3/4
48
50-3/8
56-3/8
62-3/8
57
21-5/8
29 1/16
FRONT VIEW
LRW33
H
J
2
2
H
For rough opening,
FLOW
36-1/4
Size
D
SIDE VIEW
J
1 1/2
33
K
F
24
Size
30
24
36
30
42
36
48
42
54
48
32-3/8
K
38-3/8
32-3/8
44-3/8
38-3/8
50-3/8
44-3/8
56-3/8
50-3/8
62-3/8
56-3/8
K
414
36
32-3/8
38-3/8
44-3/8
800-325-3055
42
50-3/8
48
56-3/8
54
62-3/8
6
L
M
FRONT VIE
K
Housing Guards
to24‘K’
‘G’ for1/2”
Height
For 4” Wall: Add 11/4” toadd
For 6” Wall: Add 11/2” to ‘G’ for Height30
FRONT
2
H
4
29 9/16
G
L
add
1/2” to ’M’
4 VIEW
SIDE
SHIPPED FOB:
Add 1/2” to ‘E’ for Width
For 2” Wall: Add 3/4” to ‘G’ for Height
E
E
2
L
42-1/4
39
LRW39
D
M
G
G
K
1 1/2
J 29-11/16 2
2
E
J
48-1/4
45
LRW45
30-1/2
R
AI
1
Shutter
L
M
1 2 /Shutter
37-11/16 32-11/16
23-7/8
29 1/16
24 42 32-3/8
L
M
LL
2
FLOW
54-1/4 2 /2 51 Model
62-3/8
68-11/16 63-1/16
22-3/4
32-9/16 LRW51
54
Model
O.D.
I.D.
O.D.
I.D.
Size
K
Size
K
56-3/8 44-1/2
38-3/4
23
29 1/1633
30 48 38-3/8
68-1/4
74-1/4
69-1/8
22-1/4
60
14 1/8
30-1/4 30-1/4
27
LRW27
60-1/4
57
LRW57
32-3/8
24
For rough opening,
27
2
LRW27
1
H
32-3/8
24
1
/
Size
E
F
G
H
J
2
26 3/8
44-13/16
22-1/2
29 9/16
36 54 44-3/8
Rough Opening
for GSWH &
SWHA
Housings:
2
62-3/8
2
E
J
54 add 1/2”
62-3/8 50-5/16
to ‘K’
36-1/4
33
LRW33
F
38-3/8
30
69-1/4
LRW66 FRONT
VIEW 66
SIDE VIEW 36-1/4
33
LRW33
32-3/8
37-11/16 32-11/16
29 1/16
24
G 14 1/8
‘E’ 50-15/16
for Width
/4” to ‘G’ for Height G
For38-3/8
4” Wall: Add 1129-11/16
Add 1/2” to 23-7/8
50-3/8
56-5/16
21-3/4
30
42
42-1/4
39
LRW39
For
rough opening,
For rough opening,
3
L
M
3
1
44-3/8
36
26
/
Add /4” to ‘G’
For 6” Wall: Add 1 /2” to ‘G’ for Height
8
K29 1/16
38-3/8
44-1/2
38-3/4
23for Height
30
For rough opening,
add 1/2” to ‘K’
add 1/2”
toFor
‘K’2” Wall:
Florida 6
42-1/4
39
LRW39
48-1/4
45
56-3/8
62-3/8
57
21-5/850-3/8 30-1/2
48
MLRW45 AI
R
44-3/8
add 1/2” toL ’M’
44-3/8
50-5/16 44-13/16 K 22-1/2 3629 9/1642
36
F
OW
54-1/4
51
LRW51
FL
48-1/4
45
LRW45
G
68-11/16 21-3/4
63-1/16
22-3/4
54
50-3/8 62-3/8
56-5/16 50-15/16
48 G 56-3/832-9/16
42
6
6 4229-11/1650-3/8
60-1/4
57
LRW57
54-1/4
51
LRW51
56-3/8 68-1/4
62-3/8
57
21-5/8
48
74-1/4
69-1/830-1/2 22-1/4
60
62-3/8 33
54
AIR
69-1/4
66
56-3/8
LRW66
48
1
2
FLOW
14
H x 1”57
/8
P.V.C. coated wire guards come standard
62-3/8 Rough
68-11/16
63-1/16
22-3/4 & SWHA
32-9/16
54
For Housings:
rough opening,
60-1/4
LRW57 1/2”
Opening
for
26 3GSWH
/8
For rough opening,
add 1/2” to ‘K’
Shutter
L
M
on
all
wall
housings. Slope and square wall housings
68-1/4
74-1/4
69-1/8
22-1/4 54 33 62-3/8
60
2 1/2
L
add 1/2”
to ’M’
FRONT
VIEW
SIDE
VIEW
1
1
For 4” Wall: Add
1 / ” to K‘G’ for Height
69-1/4
66
2 ModelLRW66
O.D.
I.D.
1Add /2” to ‘E’ for Width
H
Size 4
14Opening
/8
Rough
for GSWH & SWHA Housings:
have front and rear guards.
For6”rough
6
For 2” Wall: Add263/34/”8 to ‘G’ for Height For
Wall: opening,
Add 11/2” to ‘G’ for
Height
30-1/4
27
LRW27
FRONT
VIEW
SIDE VIEW
For rough opening,
K Size 36
3
38-3/4
18
44-3/8
36
G
1
NBFA/AL54
cold climate30conditions
38-3/8
44-1/2
FRONT VIEW
An exterior unit to24
house32-3/8
the
37-11/16 32-11/16
23-7/8
29 1/16
1 /2
4
G
H
J
2
NBF/AL fan
andSize
the LRWE shutter.F
38-3/8
44-1/2
38-3/4
23
29 1/16
30
SIDE
A
32-3/8
37-11/16
32-11/16
23-7/8
29
1/16
24
D
GWH is constructed
of
heavy
• TheVIEW
44-3/8
50-5/16 44-13/16
22-1/2
29 9/16
36
AIR
38-3/8
44-1/2
38-3/4
23
29 1/16
30
gauge galvanized
steel
FLOW
50-3/8
56-5/16 50-15/16
21-3/4
29-11/16
42
44-3/8 of 50-5/16 44-13/16
22-1/2
29 9/16
36
• The WHA is constructed
56-3/8
62-3/8
57
21-5/8
30-1/2 G
48
G
aluminum
50-3/8
56-5/16 50-15/16
21-3/4
29-11/16
42
C
1
4
ShutterC
L
M
62-3/8
68-11/16
63-1/16
22-3/4
32-9/16
54
2 /2
Both canO.D.
be attached
to exterior
• BModel
62-3/8
57
21-5/8
30-1/2
481I.D.
1
/2 56-3/8
2D walls
B to Jfree the60
68-1/4
74-1/4
69-1/8
22-1/4
33
interior
space
68-11/16 63-1/16
22-3/4
32-9/16
30-1/4 54 27 62-3/8
LRW27
from obstructions Rough Opening for GSWH & SWHA Housings:
68-1/4
74-1/4
69-1/8
22-1/4
33
60
1/2” wire
2
Guards331/2” Add
x 1”
•LRW33
Housing36-1/4
to ‘E’ for Width
For 4” Wall: Add 11/4” to ‘G’ for Height
Rough Opening
for GSWH & SWHA Housings:
SIDE 42-1/4
A
3/4”all
1/2” to ‘G’ for Height
39
LRW39
guards
come
standard
on
wall
For
2”
Wall:
Add
For
6”
Wall:
Add
1
to
‘G’
for
Height
F
J VIEW 1 /
2M
1/2” to ‘E’ for Width
Add housings
For 4” Wall: Add 11/4” to ‘G’ for Height
AIR
housings.
SlopeG45wall
48-1/4
LRW45
FLOW
SIDE
A
3/4” to ‘G’ for Height
For
2” Wall: Add
For 6” Wall: Add 11/2” to ‘G’ for Height
have
a
front
guard,
while
the
VIEW
54-1/4
51
LRW51
AIR
AIR square
wall housings have a rear
FLOW
F FLOWLRW57
60-1/4
57 guards are
guard.
Shutter-side
G
4
also available.
69-1/4
66
LRW66
D
AIR
G
NBF60
FRONT VIEW
1
F
62-3/8
A
2
H
B
FRONT VIEW
A
SIDE
VIEW
Square Wall Housing
GWH
& WHA
SIDE VIEW
D
Fan Model
A
B
C
D
57
21-5/8
30-1/2
AAIR
Size
F
HD
J
K
Fan types
Model Eof materials
A
Bto G Size
C
2
E
Two
32
5-1/8
12-1/2
5
NBF/AL24
FLOW
/8
68-11/16 63-1/16
22-3/4
32-9/16
32-3/8 3237-11/16
32-11/16
23-7/8
29 1/16
24
choose
from:
32-3/8
24
5-1/8
12-1/2
5
NBF/AL24
38
5-1/8
12-1/2
5-1/8
NBF/AL30
/4
74-1/4
69-1/8
22-1/4
33
38-3/8
44-1/2
38-3/430 of 23
29 1/16
• 30
GSWH
housing
is constructed
38-3/8
44
5-1/8
13-1/4
NBF/AL36
H
38
5-1/8
12-1/2
5-1/8 5-1/4
NBF/AL30
Opening for GSWH
&
SWHA
Housings:
galvanized
for long,
durable22-1/2 29 9/16
44-3/8 steel
50-5/16
44-13/16
36
L
50 F 5-1/8
Size
G 13-1/4
H 5-7/8
J
NBF/AL42 E
44-3/8
36
2
FRONT
VIEW
SIDE
VIEW
E
1/4”maintenance
K
13-1/4
5-1/4
” to ‘E’ for Width NBF/AL36
to ‘G’ for5-1/8
Height
For 4” Wall:
Add
144
wear
and
low
G
50-3/8NBF/AL48
50-15/16
21-3/4
29-11/16
42
32-3/8 5637-11/16
32-11/16
23-7/8
24 56-5/16
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/4 29 1/16
1/2” to ‘G’ for Height
50-3/8
42
For
6”
Wall:
Add
1
4” to ‘G’ for Height
• NBF/AL42
SWHA56-3/8
is constructed
of44-1/2
aluminum
5-1/8
5-7/823 30-1/2
38-3/8
38-3/4
29 1/16
3050 62-3/8
C
5713-1/4
21-5/8
48
62
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/2
NBFA/AL54
for a rust-resistant
A
48
Fan Model
A
B
Cfinish.
D The
44-3/8
50-5/16
44-13/1656-3/8
22-1/2
29 9/16
36
B
62-3/8housing
22-3/4
54
5668-11/16
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/4 32-9/16
NBF/AL48
68 63-1/16
6-1/8
18
6
NBF60
slope
wall
allows
the
G
FRONT
VIEW
50-3/8
56-5/16
50-15/1662-3/8
21-3/4
29-11/16
42
32
5-1/8
12-1/2
5
NBF/AL24
54
68-1/4
74-1/4
69-1/8
60
shutter
placed
on62-3/8
the13-1/4
intake
1to be
56-3/8
5722-1/4
21-5/8 3330-1/2
5-1/8
6-1/2
4862
NBFA/AL54
14
38 /8
5-1/8
12-1/2
5-1/8For rough opening,
NBF/AL30
3
side of
theOpening
fan
the
26
Rough
for eliminates
GSWH
& SWHA
Housings:
62-3/8
68-11/16
63-1/16
32-9/16
54 /8 and
add
1/2”
to ‘K’22-3/4
68
6-1/8 5-1/4 18
NBF6044
5-1/8
13-1/4
NBF/AL36
FRONT VIEW
FRONT VIEW
air
turbulence
that
occurs
the11/46” 22-1/4
68-1/4
74-1/4
33
‘E’ for
Width
to ‘G’ for Height
Add 1/2” to60
For
4”with
Wall:69-1/8
Add
SIDE
A
L VIEW M
5-1/8 exhaust
13-1/4
5-7/8
NBF/AL42
side
of the
It for
also
Rough
Opening
for
& SWHA
Housings:
2 1/2
3/4”the
1/2” to
6Shutter
Forshutter
2” Wall: 50
Addon
For
6”LGSWH
Wall:
Add
1fan.
to ‘G’ for
Height
‘G’
Height
AIR
Model
O.D.
I.D.
FRONT
VIEW
1
1
Size56 the
K
prevents
warm
from
lost
/ ” air
to ‘E’ for
Width being
/ ” to ‘G’ for Height
For 4” Wall:
Add 1through
Add13-1/4
FLOW
5-1/8
6-1/4
NBF/AL48
Size
E2
F
G
H4
J
2
E
2
For
2” Wall:
Add 3/4” to ‘G’ to
For
6” Wall: Addcold
11/2” to ‘G’air
for Height
for Height
the 24
metal
wall
housing
the
outside
in
30-1/4
27
LRW27
32-3/8
37-11/16
32-11/16
23-7/8
29
1/16
24
32-3/8
62
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/2
/8
AIR
FLOW
A
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/2
For
4” Wall:12-1/2
Add
11/4” to5 ‘G’ for Height
5-1/8
For
6” Wall:12-1/2
Add 611/2”5-1/8
to ‘G’ for Height
18
Slope
Wall
Housing 44-13/16
22-1/2
29 9/16
& 29-11/16
SWHA
56-5/16 GSWH
50-15/16
21-3/4
44-1/2
50-5/16
E
SIDE
VIEW
A
G
62-3/8
68-11/16 63-1/16
22-3/4
32-9/16
54
50
5-1/8
13-1/4
5-7/8
NBF/AL42
68-1/4
74-1/4
69-1/8
22-1/4
33
60
56Model 5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/4 D
NBF/AL48
Fan
Rough
Opening forAGSWH B& SWHAC Housings:
32
5-1/8
1/2”62
NBFA/AL54Add NBF/AL24
to ‘E’ for Width
3/4” to ‘G’ for Height
38
For
2” Wall: AddNBF/AL30
68
6-1/8
NBF60
G
H
J
A complete
B ventilation package that
combines the NBF powder
coated steel fan with all
aluminum shutter (type LRW),
a heavy gauge galvanized steel
wall
housing (square
SIDE box or
A
slope) and PVC VIEW
coated wire
AIR
inlet
and outlet guards.
FLOW
• The exhaust fan
panel is fabricated from heavy
gauge steel and features an
4 construction.
Fan Model The A
B
C
D
all-welded
uprights
which support the
D
32
5-1/8
12-1/2
NBF/AL24
Fan Modelare A
B
C
D 5
motor and propeller
5-1/8 12-1/2
12-1/2
NBF/AL30
formed from NBF/AL24
heavy
gauge32 38 5-1/8
55-1/8
steel for maximum strength
44
5-1/8
13-1/4
5-1/4
NBF/AL36
38
5-1/8
12-1/2
5-1/8
and rigidity NBF/AL30
5-1/8 13-1/4
13-1/4 5-1/4
5-7/8
• Parts are powder
coated with
NBF/AL42
44 50 a 5-1/8
NBF/AL36
1 1/2
J
2thermosetting
epoxy coating to provide
C
56
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/4
NBF/AL48
5-1/8for 13-1/4
5-7/8
NBF/AL42rated 50
a protective coating
excellent
B
hardness, impact
resistance,
adhesion
and
62
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/2
NBFA/AL54
56
5-1/8
13-1/4
6-1/4
NBF/AL48
chemical resistance
F
68
6-1/8 13-1/4
18
6
NBF60
62
5-1/8
6-1/2
NBFA/AL54
• The MNFB series of
G fans utilize the same drive assembly as the
MAL series NBF60
68
6-1/8
18
6
A
LRW33
add 1/2”33to ’M’
36-1/4
LRW39
42-1/4
39
LRW45
48-1/4
45
LRW51
54-1/4
51
LRW57
60-1/4
57
www.hummert.com
L
L
Exhaust Fans
• All motors are energy efficient, totally enclosed, ball bearing motors. Single phase motors include automatic reset overload protection. Three
phase motors do not include overload protection
• Wall housing ships knocked-down for assembly with fan and shutter. 1/2” x 1” PVC coated wire guard included with wall housings
• Optional belt tighteners are ordered separately and are factory mounted
Aluminum - MAL series
MAL series exhaust fans are aluminum fans assembled in aluminum slope wall housing with motor mounted. Assemblies are complete with fan,
motor, LRW shutter, slope wall housing and one wall housing guard.
T WO S PEE D
O N E S PEE D
Fan
Fan Motor Fan .05”SP
PC-1PC-2 PC-1PC-2 PC-1PC-2
Model
Size HP RPM CFM BHP 115/230V
1-4
5 & Up
115V
1-4
5 & Up
230V
1-4
5 & Up
MAL24H 24” 1/3
769
5,680 0.35 28-7300-
$ —
$ — 28-7350-
$ —
$ — 28-7363-
$ —
$—
MAL24J
1/2
891 6,654 0.53 28-7301-
—
— 28-7351-
—
— 28-7364-
—
—
MAL24K
3/4 1042 7,846 0.84 28-7302-
—
— 28-7352-
—
— 28-7365-
—
—
MAL30H 30” 1/3
531 7,258 0.32 28-7303-
—
— 28-7353-
—
— 28-7366-
—
—
MAL30J
1/2
641 8,968 0.54 28-7304-
—
— 28-7354-
—
— 28-7367-
—
—
MAL30K
3/4
739 10,466 0.83 28-7305-
—
— 28-7355-
—
— 28-7368-
—
—
MAL36H
1/3
447 9,007 0.32 28-7306-
—
— 28-7356-
—
— 28-7369-
—
—
MAL36J 36” 1/2
524 10,793 0.51 28-7307-
—
— 28-7357-
—
— 28-7370-
—
—
MAL36K
3/4
615 12,868 0.80 28-7308-
—
— 28-7358-
—
— 28-7371-
—
—
MAL36L
1 69214,6041.1228-7309-
—
— —
—
—
—
—
—
MAL42J 42” 1/2
371 12,986 0.49 28-7310-
—
— 28-7359-
—
— 28-7372-
—
—
MAL42K
3/4
430 15,372 0.75 28-7311-
—
— 28-7360-
—
— 28-7373-
—
—
MAL42L
1
492 17,821 1.11 28-7312-
—
—
—
—
—
———
MAL48J 48” 1/2
307 15,278 0.52 28-7313-
——
28-7361- ——
28-7374- ——
MAL48K
3/4
358 18,315 0.82 28-7314-
—
— 28-7362-
—
— 28-7375-
—
—
MAL48L
1
408 21,212 1.19 28-7315-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MAL54L 54”
1
374 22,693 1.11 28-7316-
—
—
— —————
MAL54M
1
1/2 25,381 1.50 28-7317-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MNBF series exhaust fans are powder coated steel fans assembled in slope wall housing with motor mounted. Assemblies are complete with
fan, motor, LRW shutter, slope wall housing and one wall housing guard
Fan
Fan Motor Fan
Model
Size
HP RPM
MNBF24G 24” 1/4 688
MNBF24H 1/3 769
MNBF24J 1/2 891
MNBF24K 3/4 1042
MNBF30G 30” 1/4 491
MNBF30H
1/3 531
MNBF30J 1/2 641
MNBF30K
3/4 739
MNBF36H 36” 1/3 447
MNBF36J
1/2 524
MNBF36K
3/4 615
MNBF36L
1
692
MNBF42J 42” 1/2 371
MNBF42K
3/4 430
MNBF42L
1
492
MNBF48J 48” 1/2 307
MNBF48K
3/4 358
MNBF48L
1
380
MNBFA54L 54”
1
374
MNBFA54M
1-1/2 414
T WO S PE ED
O N E S PE ED
.05” SP*
PC-1
PC-2PC-1
PC-2PC-1
PC-2
CFM* BHP* 115/230V
1-4
5 & Up
115V
1-4
5 & Up
230V
1-4
5 & Up
5,026 0.25 28-7400-
$ —
$ — 28-7450-
$ —
$ — 28-7465-
$ —
$—
5,680 0.35 28-7401-
—
— 28-7451-
—
— 28-7466-
—
—
6,654 0.53 28-7402-
—
— 28-7452-
—
— 28-7467-
—
—
7,846 0.84 28-7403-
—
— 28-7453-
—
— 28-7468-
—
—
6,625 0.25 28-7404-
—
— 28-7454-
—
— 28-7469-
—
—
7,258 0.32 28-7405-
—
— 28-7455-
—
— 28-7470-
—
—
8,968 0.54 28-7406-
—
— 28-7456-
—
— 28-7471-
—
—
10,466 0.83 28-7407-
—
— 28-7457-
—
— 28-7472-
—
—
9,007 0.32 28-7408-
—
— 28-7458-
—
— 28-7473-
—
—
10,793 0.51 28-7409-
—
— 28-7459-
—
— 28-7474-
—
—
12,868 0.80 28-7410-
—
— 28-7460-
—
— 28-7475-
—
—
14,604 1.12 28-7411-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
12,986 0.49 28-7412-
—
— 28-7461-
—
— 28-7476-
—
—
15,372 0.75 28-7413-
—
— 28-7462-
—
— 28-7477-
—
—
17,821 1.11 28-7414-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
15,278 0.52 28-7415-
—
— 28-7463-
—
— 28-7478-
—
—
18,315 0.82 28-7416-
—
— 28-7464-
—
— 28-7479-
—
—
19,597 0.97 28-7417-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
22,693 1.11 28-7418-
—
—
——
—
—
—
—
25,381 1.50 28-7419-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Automatic Belt Tightener Kits
Catalog
Model Description
Number
Price
ABT3 Spring Belt – Fits NBF & AL 36” fan and up 28-7480-1
$—
RBT1 Rotary Belt – Fits both AL 24” & 30” & NBF 24” & 30” fans 28-7481-1
—
RBT2 Rotary Belt – Fits NBF 36”, 42” and 54” 28-7482-1
—
RBT3 Rotary Belt – Fits NBF 48” and AL 36”, 42”, 48” and 54” 28-7483-1
—
800-325-3055
SHIPPED FOB:
Florida
*CFM = Cubic feet/minute
*SP = Static pressure
*BHP = Brake horse power
www.hummert.com
415
American Coolair exhaust fans
Powder Coated Steel - MNBF series
1
forfor
Width
For 2” Wall:Add
Add /32/”4”toto‘E’‘G’
Height
For 2” Wall: Add 3/4” to ‘G’ for Height
All-Aluminum Shutter - LRW
1
For rough opening,
Number
For
rough
add
1/2”opening,
to ‘K’
add 1/2” to ‘K’
Model
LRW27
LRW33
LRW39
LRW45
LRW51
LRW57
LRW66
/8
on all movable linkage.14 /8 26
26 3/8
Sturdy, extruded aluminum
tiebar connect on the blade
centers. Double panel
shutters feature dual tie-bars
(one for each panel). Can be
gravity or motor operated.
3
28-7235-
28-7236-
28-7237-
28-7238-
28-7239-
28-7240-
28-7241-
2 1/2
2 1/2
L
L
Size
K
Size
K
32-3/8
24
32-3/8
24
38-3/8
The LRW Shutter is an all aluminum damper 30
featuring
38-3/8
30
an extruded aluminum frame with interlocking
44-3/8
36 aluminum
K
44-3/8
36
blades for maximum weather seal.
K
50-3/8
42
Double panel shutters (LRW45 and larger) are42
50-3/8
56-3/8
48
constructed with a rigid ‘T’ section center member
to
56-3/8
48
prevent shutter blades from
62-3/8
54
62-3/8 PC-1
54
Catalog
sticking. Has nylon bearings
14 1/
8
FRONT VIEW
1
For
For 4”
6” Wall:
Wall: Add
Add 111//42”” to
to ‘G’
‘G’ for
for Height
Height
For 6” Wall: Add 11/2” to ‘G’ for Height
L
L
PC-2
1-4
5 & up
$ —
$—
6
— 6
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
M
M
SIDE VIEW
Shutter
Shutter
Model
Model
Model
Shutter
LL
O.D.
O.D.
O.D.
L
M
M
I.D.
I.D.
I.D.
M
LRW27
LRW27
LRW33
LRW33
LRW39
LRW39
LRW45
LRW45
LRW51
LRW51
LRW57
LRW57
LRW66
LRW66
30-1/4
30-1/4
36-1/4
36-1/4
42-1/4
42-1/4
48-1/4
48-1/4
54-1/4
54-1/4
60-1/4
60-1/4
69-1/4
69-1/4
27
27
33
33
39
39
45
45
51
51
57
57
66
66
Fan
Size
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
For rough opening,
For rough
opening,
add
1/2” to ‘M’
Foradd
rough
1/2”opening,
to ’M’
add 1/2” to ’M’
SHIPPED FOB:
Florida
Motorized Inlet Shutter - LRW-E
The LRW-E Shutter allows fresh air to enter the green­house as fans at the opposite side/end
exhaust it. Sturdy aluminum frame, blades, and reinforcing brackets with nylon bearings on
all movable linkage. Comes standard with motor to open and close blades automatically.
American Coolair shutters
Air Flow Required
Overall
Capacity Opening Dimensions
Model
(CFM) Dimensions Incl.Flange
LRW16E 1,000161⁄2 square191⁄4 square
LRW21E 1,800211⁄2 square241⁄4 square
LRW27E 3,000271⁄2 square301⁄4 square
LRW33E 4,500331⁄2 square361⁄4 square
LRW39E 6,300391⁄2 square421⁄4 square
LRW45E 8,400451⁄2 square481⁄4 square
LRW51E 10,700511⁄2 square541⁄4 square
Catalog
N
umber
PC-1
PC-2
115 volt
1-4 5 & up
28-7245-
$ —
$—
28-7246-— —
28-7247-— —
28-7248-— —
28-7249-— —
28-7250-— —
28-7251-— —
CO2 Generator
Exhaust Fan - CDP/WS
CDP/WS fans are engineered for minimal
maintenance, efficient and economical
operation. Designed to exhaust relatively low
volumes of air from smaller greenhouses.
Each CDP/WS fan features an aluminum
propeller which mounts directly to the motor
shaft. Motors are permanently lubricated and
totally enclosed. A welded steel inlet guard is
standard. An optional speed controller accessory allows the motor speed to be varied to
achieve performances from 50% to 100% of
CFM ratings. Exhaust fans are 115 volt, single
phase. CDP/WS are complete with fan already
mounted in a galvanized steel wall sleeve, with
aluminum SU shutterOptional
and mounting flanges.
Speed Up Plant Growth and
Improve Quality
This low-cost generator provides the CO2
necessary to speed up plant growth during
the shorter daylight hours of winter. Plant
quality is also improved as you add low
cost warmth to your greenhouse.
Specifications:
SU Shutter
Optional
SU Shutter
Dimensions in Inches
Fan
Size
7-8
Airflow
10
Airflow
14
16
3
C
5 7/8
A SQ.
FRONT VIEW
A SQ.
FRONT VIEW
18
B
3
SIDE VIEW C
7
5 /8
B
SIDE VIEW
A
Wall
B Dimensions
C
in Opening
Inches
14 1/4
5
5 9/16
Fan
A
B
C
Size
18 1/4
5
6 1/16
7-8
14 1/4
5
5 9/16
22 1/4
5
6 1/16
10
18 1/4
5
6 1/16
22 1/4
7 1/2
6 1/16
14
22 1/4
5
6 1/16
26 1/4
7 1/2
6 1/16
16
22 1/4
7 1/2
6 1/16
15
19
23
23
27
Wall
Opening
15
19
23
23
18
26 1/4
7 1/2
6 1/16 Florida
27
SHIPPED
FOB:
Fan Motor CFM atPressure ShutterCatalogPC-1PC-2
Model
Size HPStatic 0”
1/10” ModelNumber
1-4
5 & up
CDP/WS7B17 7” 1/20 333
263
SU7-8 28-7270-
$ —
$—
CDP/WS8B17 8”1/20530
458 SU7-8 28-7271-
—
—
CDP/WS10B15 10” 1/20 793
706 SU-10-12 28-7272-
—
—
CDP/WS14B15 14” 1/20 1444
1028 SU-14-16 28-7273-
—
—
CDP/WS16G11 16” 1/4 2388
2243 SU-14-16 28-7274-
—
—
CDP/WS18G10 18” 1/4 3281
2932 SU-18-20 28-7275-
—
—
416
800-325-3055
Air Flow Required
Overall Catalog
Capacity Opening Dimensions Number
PC-1
PC-2
Model
(CFM) Dimensions Incl.Flange 115 volt
1-4 5 & up
LRW57E 13,400571⁄2 square601⁄4 square 28-7252-
$ —
$—
LRW66E 18,000661⁄2 square691⁄4 square 28-7253-— —
LRW4515E 2,800451⁄2 x 151⁄2481⁄4 x 181⁄4 28-7254-— —
LRW4527E 5,000451⁄2 x 271⁄2481⁄4 x 301⁄4 28-7255-— —
LRW6024E 6,000601⁄2 x 241⁄2631⁄4 x 271⁄4 28-7257-— —
LRW6036E 8,900601⁄2 x 361⁄2631⁄4 x 391⁄4 28-7258-— —
SHIPPED FOB:
Iowa
Greenhouse area fertilized per unit* .................................. 4,800 sq ft
Burner Range BTU/Hr*................................................... 20,000-60,000
Cubic feet/hr CO2 @ 60°F *.............................................................. 72
Pounds CO2 /hr*............................................................................. 8.25
Dimensions: .................................................................. 18” dia, 20” H
Shipping Weight: ........................................................................25 lbs
Gas Solenoid Valve: .....................................24v – 60 cycle / standard
Safety Control: .......................................................................standard
Pressure gauge: .....................................................................standard
*Based on one air change/ hour to furnish 1500 ppm CO2 using .L P
gas. CO2 production slightly less when burning natural gas.
JOHNSON CO2 GENERATOR - with 24-volt solenoid safety valve
and gas pressure gauge. (Unit is supplied with factory-installed natural
gas orifice. LP orifice also included as option).
34-5000-1
$—
Transformer - required for one unit – but can be
used to operate two additional units. 115v/24 v; 50va
19-0750-1
$ —
CONTROL PACKAGE (optional) - Automatically turns
unit(s) on before sunrise – off after sunset. Package controls up to 3
units. Includes thermostat (Range: 55˚ - 85˚), 24-hour timer (115v
60 cycle).
34-5020-1
$—
www.hummert.com
Horizontal Air Flow (HAF) Fans
Calculating HAF Fan Requirements
Versa-Kool HAF Fans
Typical fan placement for
free standing greenhouse
Fan selection is based upon 2.5 to 3 cu ft/minute (CFM) of greenhouse floor area. Example: length x width x 2.5 or 3 = total CFM
required. Next divide the total CFM required, by the CFM performance. This equals the approximate number of fans required.
Model
No. Size CFM
HP
Volts Amps Var Speed
VK8
8” 448 1/100
115
0.6
No
VK12
12” 1554 1/10 115/230 1.3/.65
Yes
VK20PA 20” 5,418 1/3 115/230 3.9/1.9
Yes
VK24PA 24” 7,748 1/2 115/230 4.8/2.4
Yes
SHIPPED FOB:
Model
Number
VK8
VK12
VK20PA
SHIPPED FOB:
Hummert Warehouse
Catalog
Number
33-3919-
33-3920-
33-3921-
PC-1
1-5
$ —
—
—
PC-2
6 & Up
$—
—
—
Minnesota
Model Catalog
Number Number
VK12 33-3925-
VK20PA 33-3926-
VK24PA 33-3927-
PC-1
1-5 $ —
—
—
PC-2
6-19 $ —
—
—
PC-3
20 & Up
$—
—
—
U-Bolts used to hang HAF fans (1 kit required per fan)
8” and 12” fan
33-3939-1
$—
20” and 24” fan
33-3940-1
—
Schaefer Fan Controls
Manual Variable Speed
Model H-115
Can be used to adjust air flow from 20% to 100% of fan output
capacity. They also have the ability to turn the fan(s) completely off.
Supplied in watertight enclosure with approved connectors.
To be used on 12” or smaller circulation/exhaust fans.
Suitable for 2 x 12” fans.
H-115
MSC-400
Model MSC-400
Controls up to 8 each VK12 or 2 each Model VK20/VK24
Automatic Variable Speed Control
Model AVS-500
Similar to above control except automatic shut off / on
Model AVS-550
Same as AVS-500 but with digital readout
AVS-500
800-325-3055
AVS-550
Catalog
Model
AmpsVoltage Number
Price
H-115
5
115 33-3931-1
$—
MSC-400
12.5 115/23033-3922-1
—
AVS-500
10 115/23033-3935-1
—
AVS-550
10 115/23033-3936-1
—
www.hummert.com
417
Schaefer HAF fans
Theses patented fans are very quiet, highly efficient and durable!
Features:
• Fan guard spacing is larger than traditional basket fans and
provides more air movement
• Heavy-duty, totally enclosed, maintenance free and energy
efficient motors
• Noise levels are low
• Tapered vinyl coated fan guard
• Heavy-duty aluminum blades
• Standard cord length of 5’ ( 8’ or 10’ is also available as
special order.) Please specify at time of order
Wt
8
18
37
46
Valu-Master
HAF Fans
Horizontal
Air Fan
Eliminate air stratification, reduce condensation, and eliminate
hot and cold spots effectively and economically with BK Basket
fans. They feature aluminum propellers directly mounted to totally
enclosed motors, steel guards that comply with OSHA standards, and
cord sets that plug into standard 115 volt electrical outlets.
The circulation airflow needed is 2-1/2 to 3 CFM per square foot of
floor space. Use whenever house exhaust is not operating at full
capacity. Should be installed above the top of crops to be cooled,
but no closer than 1 foot from roof.
Features:
BK Basket Fan
• Propeller – Aluminum blades held securely in place by a steel spider
and hub provides quiet operation
• Guards – Two piece wire guard for easy access has a gray plastic
coating to resist corrosion
• Installation – Two piece rotational bracket provides a locking tilt
adjustment for proper angle of air flow. “S” bracket provides two different dimensional mounts
• Motor – heavy-duty PSC, totally enclosed motor with automatic thermal overload protection and ball bearings is energy efficient. Motor
can be used with variable speed c
­ ontrol for more precise air movement
• Wiring – Motor comes factory-wired on the “A4” with a 6,’ three
conductor cord with grounding type molded plug for easy installation.
The “F4” motor has the specified 8’ cord shipped unattached
horizontal air fans & ventilation
Model
Var. Speed
Number Size CFM HP Volts ApprovedWt
HAF20A4 20” 30051/15 115
Yes
35
HAF20F4 20” 2105 1/3115/230
No
35
Model CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Number
Number
1-4
5 & up
HAF20A4 28-2002-
$ —
$—
HAF20F428-2000-
—
—
SHIPPED FOB:
These fans feature coated
steel wire guards and each fan
comes with a rafter hanging
kit designed to easily mount
to a “2-by” wooden beam, or
up to 2-1/8” metal tubing. The
standard mounting kit features
2-axis pivot adjustment to allow
for precise vertical and horizontal orientation.
Fan
Model Size
BK18B11 18”
BK18G11 18”
BK20B11 20”
BK20G11 20”
Motor
HP Volt
1/15 115
1/4 115
1/15 115
1/4 115
Fan
RPM CFM
1,075 2,310
1,125 3,130
1,075 2,960
1,125 3,880
Catalog
Number
28-7264-
28-7265-
28-7266-
28-7267-
PC-1
1-4
$ —
—
—
—
PC-2
5 & up
$—
—
—
—
SHIPPED FOB:
Oklahoma
Florida
Automatic Ventilation
• The Sesam Liberty and Univent automatically adjusts ventilation
according to the temperature inside your greenhouse
• The Sesam Liberty and Univent do not require electricity need no wiring; they operate by means of solar energy
• Units are made from rustproof materials lasting for many years.
The Sesam Liberty and Univent have a one year limited warranty.
• For winter storage, it is recommended that the Sesam Liberty and
Univent be removed from your greenhouse or cold frame.
Sesam Liberty
Automatically opens and closes your greenhouse louver windows
according to changes in temperature. The unit can be adjusted to start
opening at a temperature range from 60.8ºF to 77ºF. The Sesam Liberty
fits most common louver windows.
Sesam Liberty
Univent
Provides automatic ventilation for your garden cold frame or roof vent of
your hobby greenhouse. The Univent has an extra strong lock and backstop springs and can be applied to top hung windows in vertical walls.
Maximum window opening is 18”. Maximum opening is at 86ºF depending upon adjustment and load. The Univent is designed to open and
close greenhouse vents or cold frames weighing up to 15 lbs.
GigaVent
Lifting up to 65 lbs., the GigaVent is much stronger, is made of long-lasting
materials, including stainless steel, brass and aluminum, and can be adjusted for different opening heights.
The GigaVent has a hydraulic
cylinder, which can be fitted at
either end for a total of 24 possible
combinations. Dampening springs
act as shock absorbers and prevent fluttering during strong winds,
protecting your solar vent while
allowing natural ventilation.
Gigavent
418
800-325-3055
Univent
Lifting
Catalog
Model
Capacity Number
Sesam Liberty
—
26-7067-
Univent
15 Lbs 26-7066-
GigaVent
65 Lbs 26-7068-
PC-1
1-11
$ —
—
—
PC-2
12 & Up
$—
—
—
www.hummert.com
Air Distribution System
The Fan-Jet is a special tube pressurizing fan with curved stationary
discharge vanes (stator vanes) that recover the rotational energy of
discharging air to increase performance capacity and efficiency.
Quality: Fan-Jet is fully assembled at factory, test run and inspected
and then shipped ready to install with brackets and fasteners.
Quiet: Fan-Jet’s low zone ratings are an Acme tradition.
Direct Drive Models – RC 12, 18
Direct drive models are capable of variable speed control.
Belt Drive Models - RC 24, 30
Belt drive models feature no-service sealed fan shaft ball bearings
captured in a unique casting to maintain proper alignment and spacing.
Energy Efficient: All motors are totally enclosed, high efficiency
design with shielded ball bearings and include thermal overload
protection on single phase models.
Built Tough: The steel model RC is available in 12”, 18”, 24” and 30”
sizes and is rust protected with a metal wash process and a two-coat,
baked-on finish.
High Performance Propellers: The propellers are matched to
the size, performance and construction of the Fan-Jet. RC fan propellers
are welded steel with a two coat finish.
Low Cost: Fan-Jet powers more air at less horsepower for best
results at low operating costs.
F a n - J e t Pe rf ormanc e Data
Heating Capacity With Heat-Kit BTU/hr Output
Fan-Jet
Horse Tube
System
Motorized
Heat
Heater Temperature Rise Of
Model
Power
Size
CFM
Shutter Model
Accessory
40°50°
60°70°
RC12D4
1⁄8
12” *1180/780 WAAC1818MT Not Available
Not Applicable
RC18E6 1⁄418” 3120 WAAC2626MT HT18 112,000138,000
163,000186,000
RC24F
1⁄324” 5420 WAAC3333MT HT24 172,000212,000
250,000287,000
RC30G
1⁄230” 8550 waAc4040MT HT30 278,000342,000
403,000463,000
•RC12D4 has a 2-speed motor; therefore 2 different CFM’s
12” Fan-Jet
18” Fan-Jet
ModelCatalog PC-1 PC-2
Description
Number Volt Wt Number
1-4
5 & Up
Steel Fan Jet
RC18E6
115 64 28-2181-
$ —
$—
Motorized Shutter WAAC2626MT* 115 18 28-1123-
—
—
Motorized Shutter WAAC2626MT* 230 18 28-1223-
—
—
Weather Hood
RH18 35 28-2186-
—
—
Steel Heat Kit HT18 25 28-2200-
—
—
with baffle
Please order in advance of needs, as lead times can vary greatly
— Are you —
planning to build?
Call our Greenhouse Department! We can design a plan for you
Greenhouse Design Questionnaire:
See Pages 370-371
Irrigation Questionnaire:
See Page 263
800-325-3055
Description
Steel Fan Jet
Steel Fan Jet
Motorized Shutter
Motorized Shutter
Weather Hood
Steel Heat Kit
with baffle
ModelCatalog PC-1 PC-2
Number Volt Wt Number
1-4
5 & Up
RC24F
115 92 28-2241-
$ —
$—
RC24F
230 92 28-2242-
—
—
WAAC3333MT* 115 23 28-1130-
—
—
WAAC3333MT* 230 23 28-1230-
—
—
RH24
55 28-2246-
—
—
HT24
35 28-2260-
—
—
30” Fan-Jet
Description
Steel Fan Jet
Steel Fan Jet
Motorized Shutter
Motorized Shutter
Weather Hood
Steel Heat Kit
with baffle
ModelCatalog PC-1 PC-2
Number Volt Wt Number
1-4
5 & Up
RC30G
115 115 28-2301-
$ —
$—
RC30G
230 115 28-2302-
—
—
WAAC4040MT* 115 33 28-1137-
—
—
WAAC4040MT* 230 33 28-1237-
—
—
RH30
75 28-2306-
—
—
HT30
45 28-2290-
—
—
*Price includes MKCAM Motorizing Kit, which is boxed and shipped separately.
SHIPPED FOB:
Oklahoma
PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE
While the prices listed are always current at the time of publication, they
do change over the two-year time frame of our catalog. To alleviate any
problems this may cause, please call for current pricing or visit our website
www.hummert.com
419
Acme fan-jet
ModelCatalog PC-1 PC-2
Description
Number Volt Wt Number
1-4
5 & Up
Steel Fan Jet
RC12D4
115 35 28-2121-
$ —
$—
Motorized Shutter WAAC1818MT* 115 13 28-1115-
—
—
24” Fan-Jet
Polyethylene Convection Tubing - With Holes
How To Order Convection Tubing
TUBE SELECTION CHART
4 Mil-Ultraviolet – Resistant
Prices per linear foot
LayCatalog PC-1
PC-2
PC-3
Inflated Flat Number
1-999’ 1,000-4,999’ 5,000’ & Up
12”
20” 32-3512-
$ —
$—
$—
18” 28.5”32-3518-
—
—
—
24”
38”32-3524-
—
—
—
30”
47”32-3530-
—
—
—
Standard 4 mil Roll Sizes
Tube
Size
12” x 100’
18” x 100’
24” x 100’
30” x 100’
Hole Hole
Punch PunchCatalog
SizeSpacing Position Code Number Price
1.9” 36” 8/4 Standard HRZ 32-3600-$—
2.2” 24” 8/4 Standard HCA 32-3602-
—
2.2” 12” 8/4 Standard HBP 32-3604-
—
2.7” 12” 8/4 Standard HHS 32-3606-
—
SHIPPED FOB:
12”
18” FAN-JET
24” FAN-JET
30” FAN-JET
FAN-JET+
or 18” INLET
or 24” INLET
or 30” INLET
PunchTubePunchTubePunchTubePunchTube
Std CodeLength Std CodeLength Std CodeLength Std CodeLength
HFT 10’-20’ HFY18’-20’ HJX24’-27’ HKT39’-42’
HLT 20’-25’ HDY 20’-22’ HJX 27’-30’ HJT 42’-47’
HRT 25’-30’ HCY 22’-25’ HHX 30’-33’ HHT 47’-52’
HLW 30’-35’ HBY 25’-27’ HFX 33’-37’ HFT 52’-58’
HMW 35’-40’ HKN 27’-30’ HDX 37’-41’ HDT 58’-66’
HLY 40’-50’ HJN 30’-33’ HCX 41’-45’ HCT 66’-77’
HRY 50’-60’ HHN 33’-36’ HBX 45’-48’ HKS 77’-84’
HMZ 60’-75’ HFN 36’-40’ HKP 48’-53’ HJS 84’-94’
HRZ 75’-100’HDN 40’-45’ HJP 53’-59’ HHS94’-104’
HCN 45’-50’ HHP 59’-66’ HFS104’-116’
HBN 50’-55’ HFP 66’-73’ HDS116’-129’
HKA 55’-61’ HDP 73’-81’ HCS129’-145’
HJA 61’-68’ HCP 81’-90’ HBS145’-163’
HHA 68’-76’ HBP 90’-101’ HKU163’-183’
HFA 76’-85’ HKI 101’-112’ HJU183’-206’
HDA 85’-96’ HJI112’-126’
HCA96’-108’ HHI126’-142’
• 500’ is maximum length for punching 12”, 18”, 24”
• 400’ is maximum length for punching 30”
Used Unless Other Specified
Normal
For
Heating
For Max.
Lateral Airflow
8/4
7/5
3/9
New York
convection tubing
MINIMUM ORDER — Add $10.00 up-charge on all orders under
$80.00.A combination of pieces, ordered together, can meet the
minimum dollar amount. (Cat. No. 32-3550-1, $—)
Please tell your representative when ordering what
length greenhouse the tubing is to be installed or if it
will be cut into shorter lengths.
Convection Tubing
Accessories
A reusable clamp for hanging polyethylene
tubing to overhead wire.
Recommended spacing:
• 12” tubing every 10’
Packed
• 18” tubing every 10’
10 Sets/
• 24” tubing every 8’
Bag
• 30” tubing every 6’
28-2100-1
Bag of 10 Sets
$—
Tube Support Wire Package
Includes 6 strand, 10-gauge wire, turn-buckle and 2 securing clips.
Length
50’ Long Wire Package
100’ Long Wire Package
150’ Long Wire Package
420
800-325-3055
For Directional
Air Flow
Staggered
Edge Punch
Punch Code Chart
HXY: H is constant; X = Hole Diameter; Y = Hole Spacing
Hole Diameter
Tube Hangers
And Snap Rings
For Multi Directional
Air Flow
Catalog
Number
28-2116-1
28-2117-1
28-2118-1
Price
$—
—
—
Hole Spacing
For 12” Inlet
For 24” Inlet
B
2.2”
C
2.2”
T
12”
X
6”
D
2.38”
W
18”
P
12”
F
2.5”
Y
24”
I
24”
H
2.7”
Z
36”
O
48”
J
2.7”
K
2.9”
Y
For 18” Inlet
6”
For 30” Inlet
T
6”
L
2”
N
12”
S
12”
M
1.9”
A
24”
U
24”
R
1.9”
E
48”
Acme Stainless Steel
Banding Strap
For Fan-Jet 12”-18” 28-2110-1
For Fan-Jet 24”-30” 28-2115-1
$—
—
www.hummert.com
KOOL-CEL with Extruded Gutter
Model CAEG: 4” Kool-Cel Closed Aluminum Top with Extruded Gutter Cooling System
Model CSEG: 6” Kool-Cel Closed Stainless Steel Top with Extruded Gutter Cooling System
• Acme CAEG and CSEG evaporative cooling
system offers the optimal in installation ease
and upkeep
• The UV protected gutters and optional aluminum or stainless steel top
offers many years of trouble free operation
• Just glue the sections together and snap in the pad tray
• The gutter may be either mounted on the wall stringer or set on the
cement pad. Wall mount uses heavy stainless steel brackets
• ACME offers two unique top systems with the extruded gutter. The
special closed top design offers superior protection from debris. The
sump pump (70S and smaller) is located in an extension of the gutter
located at one end or mid-point
• Re-circulated water is supplied from a submerged pump through
an inline filter and water flow control. A sediment trap is included to
reduce trash in the recirculating water. In addition a bleed-off tube
allows for continual refreshment of the re-circulated water. Fresh
water is supplied by way of a Rojo or Topaz water valve
• A plumbing completer kit is available to facilitate installation
A complete system consists of several components ordered separately.
When ordering, select the proper system length CAEG or CSEG with the
optional extension in order to make the correct system length.
Additional components are: in-line or 50 gallon tank kit, water valve,
pump and optional in-line tank, wrap-around kit. End covers are required
for 4” CAEG systems.
CAEG and CSEG
Wall Mount KOOL-CEL System
CAEG and CSEG Extensions
4” Pad
6” Pad
Extension
CAEGPC-1 PC-2CSEGPC-1 PC-2
Length Cat No
1-4
5 & up Cat No
1-4
5 & up
6’
28-6525-
$ —
$ — 28-6625-
$ —
$—
7’
28-6526-
—
— 28-6626-
—
—
8’
28-6527-
—
— 28-6627-
—
—
9’
28-6528-
—
— 28-6628-
—
—
CAEG 4” System End Cover Selection
PadCatalog PC-1 PC-2 PadCatalog PC-1 PC-2
Ht Number
1- 4 5 & up Ht Number 1- 4 5 & up
24” 28-6530-
$ —
$ — 60” 28-6533-
$ —
$—
36” 28-6531-
—
— 72” 28-6534-
—
—
48” 28-6532-
—
— 84” 28-6535-
—
—
SHIPPED FOB:
Oklahoma
Contact Hummert’s Greenhouse Sales & Design Department for further assistance and pricing.
800-325-3055
Water Valves (3/4”)
Valve
Flow
Model
Rate
Rojo [email protected] psi
Topaz [email protected] psi
Catalog
Number
28-5838
28-5840
PC-1
1-4
$ —
—
PC-2
5 & Up
$—
—
Submersible Pumps
Pump
Model
Voltage
#20S
115 V
#70S
115 V
#70S
230 V
#90S
230 V
#60SFS
230 V
Catalog
Number
28-7050
28-7052
28-7054
28-7056
28-7058
PC-1
1-4
$ —
—
—
—
—
PC-2
5 & Up
$—
—
—
—
—
Pumps are single phase, 60 cycle. #90 sand #60SFS pumps are for 50
gallon tank kit only.
In-Line Tank Kit
Used for #20S and #70S
pump applications.
Catalog
Number
28-7045-
PC-1
1-4
$ —
PC-2
5 & up
$—
50 Gallon Tank Kit
Used when a #90S or #60SFS pump
is required. Replaces Transition
Tank.
Catalog
Number
28-7047-
PC-1
1-4
$ —
PC-2
5 & up
$—
In-Line Tank Wrap
Around Kit
Used when the tank is positioned at the
mid-point of a system.
Catalog
Number
28-7062-
PC-1
1-4
$ —
www.hummert.com
PC-2
5 & up
$—
421
kool-cell system & components
4” Pad
6” Pad
SystemCAEGPC-1 PC-2CSEGPC-1 PC-2
Length Cat No
1-4
5 & up Cat No
1-4
5 & up
5’
28-6500-
$ —
$ — 28-6600-
$ —
$—
10’
28-6501-
—
— 28-6601-
—
—
15’
28-6502-
—
— 28-6602-
—
—
20’
28-6503-
—
— 28-6603-
—
—
25’
28-6504-——
28-6604-— —
30’
28-6505-
—
— 28-6605-
—
—
35’
28-6506-
—
— 28-6606-
—
—
40’
28-6507-
—
— 28-6607-
—
—
45’
28-6508-——
28-6608-— —
50’
28-6509-
—
— 28-6609-
—
—
55’
28-6510-
—
— 28-6610-
—
—
60’
28-6511-
—
— 28-6611-
—
—
65’
28-6512-——
28-6612-— —
70’
28-6513-
—
— 28-6613-
—
—
75’
28-6514-
—
— 28-6614-
—
—
80’
28-6515-
—
— 28-6615-
—
—
85’
28-6516-
—
—
90’
28-6517-
—
—
95’
28-6518-
—
—
100’
28-6519-
—
—
Additional Components
TM
Aluminum PDR 4” & 6”
Water Distribution
& Return System
The Aluminum PDR 4” and 6” system utilizes quick snap together
components for easy installation using a minimum of hardware.
The heavy extruded gutter and support are designed to support the
pads and carry the water back to a sump with capacities for an 8’ x
100’ system in 4” pad and an 8’ x 80’ system in 6” pad. The
aluminum top cover is made in two pieces to facilitate cleaning
the PVC pipe if clogged.
Cools, Humidifies & Filters
• Designed for cooling with minimum resistance to air flow
through the pads
• Maintains a reasonable constant house relative humidity
despite a wide range in outdoor relative humidity
• Helps keep house, foliage and plants clean by filtering out
dust and other airborne debris, screens out larger insects
• A KOOL-CEL pad system does not sag, rot or develop holes
• With proper care, it will last for years, therefore eliminating
the annual labor and material replacement costs so common
with aspen pads
kool-cel system & components
Aluminum PDR
Distribution and Return
Includes PVC Pipe Distributors, pad covers, return gutters and
necessary connectors and fittings. To complete pad system, order
pump, Küül® pads, plumbing completer kits, and sump tank or
transition tank.
Submersible Pumps
Catalog
Number
28-9000-
28-7050-
28-7048-
28-7052-
28-7054-
28-7056-
PC-1
1-4
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
PC-2
5 & Up
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
Water Valves (3/4”)
Valve
Flow
Model
Rate
Rojo [email protected] psi
Topaz [email protected] psi
422
Catalog
Number
28-5838-
28-5840-
800-325-3055
Includes required plumbing fittings to complete Kool-Cel installation
from the sump tank to the distribution pipe.
28-7070-1$ —
System
4” Pad6” Pad
Length
Catalog No
Price
Catalog No
Price
5’
—
— 28-6105-1
$—
10’
28-6010-1
$ — 28-6110-1
—
15’
28-6015-1
—
28-6115-1
—
20’
28-6020-1
—
28-6120-1
—
25’
28-6025-1
—
28-6125-1—
30’
28-6030-1
—
28-6130-1
—
35’ 28-6035-1
—
28-6135-1
—
40’ 28-6040-1
—
28-6140-1
—
45’ 28-6045-1
—
28-6145-1—
50’ 28-6050-1
—
28-6150-11,602.00
55’ 28-6055-1
—
28-6155-1
—
60’ 28-6060-1
—
28-6160-1
—
65’ 28-6065-1
—
28-6165-1—
70’ 28-6070-1
—
28-6170-1
—
75’ 28-6075-1
—
28-6175-1
—
80’ 28-6080-1
—
28-6180-1
—
85’ 28-6085-1
—
90’ 28-6090-1
—
95’ 28-6091-1
—
100’ 28-6092-1
—
Pump
Model
Voltage
#156-CIM-R(S) 115 V
#20S
115 V
#40S
115 V
#70S
115 V
#70S
230 V
#90S
230 V
Acme Plumbing Completer Kit
PC-1
1-4
$ —
—
PC-2
5 & Up
$—
—
Replacement Parts for
Acme Kool-Cel System
odel
M
Catalog
Number Description
Number
Price
515183 PVC plug with bleed off
28-5810-1
$—
515176 Bleed off tubing
28-5815-1
—
991903 Clear Filter Bowl
28-5843-1
—
991902 Replacement Filter insert
28-5845-1
—
991996 O-ring set for filter assembly
28-5834-1
—
991904 1-1/2” PVC complete filter assembly28-5839-1
—
Clear Filter Bowl
Replacement Filter Insert
1-1/2” PVC Complete
“L” Filter Assembly
SHIPPED FOB:
Oklahoma Lead time 4 to 6 weeks
www.hummert.com
Evaporative Cooling Systems
American Coolair evaporative cooling distribution and return systems are available in both 4” or 6” aluminum or 4” or 6” PVC. The PVC Distribution
and Return is available in optional closed top PVC or open top PVC. Contact Hummert’s Greenhouse Sales and Design Department for further
information and pricing on PVC distribution and return systems as well as 6” aluminum systems
PVC
Aluminum
• System length 5’ to 90’
System height 2’ to 6’
• Completely self contained
• PVC trough and sump included
• Available in standard closed top
(system includes pipe cover/
spray deflector) or open top (for
easy access to distribution pipe)
designs
• Multiple pump designs available
Water Distribution System
The water distribution systems for the PVC, aluminum, and
doublestack designs feature PVC pipe with metered outlet holes,
water return trough, water filter, an automatic supply valve,
and a volume control valve.
All systems also include top and bottom pad support material,
water distribution pipe cover (except for open top systems),
and all necessary fasteners.
• System length 5’ to 100’
System height 2’ to 90’
• Ideal when large amount of
cooling is needed
• Extruded aluminum trough
• Aluminum pipe cover/spray
deflector
• Multiple pipe designs available
• Pump is sold separately and
should be sized for at least 3/4
gallon capacity/square foot of
pad area
It is most effective when the system is centered on the plants
to be cooled. Specific placement should be such that the upper
portion of the pad itself is on the same level as the top of the
crop to be cooled. Designs “A” and “B” show typical greenhouse
installations.
A
A A
B
B B
Pads
Sold separately
• Sump tank with lid (see page 425)
• End kits (see price table to the right)
4” Aluminum Evap Pad Systems
End Kits –
GCP6
GCP6
GCP6
requires one per system
End Kit 4 End Kit 5 End Kit 6 27-1005-1
27-1007-1
27-1009-1
$—
—
—
Height:
2 Feet
3 Feet
4 Feet
5 Feet
6 Feet
System
CatalogCatalogCatalogCatalogCatalog
Length
NumberPriceNumberPriceNumberPriceNumberPriceNumberPrice
5’ 27-0001-1
$ —27-0020-1
$ —27-0040-1
$ —27-0060-1
$ —27-0080-1
$—
10’ 27-0002-1
—27-0021-1
—27-0041-1
—27-0061-1
—27-0081-1
—
15’ 27-0003-1
—27-0022-1
—27-0042-1
—27-0062-1
—27-0082-1
—
20’ 27-0004-1
—27-0023-1
—27-0043-1
—27-0063-1
—27-0083-1
—
25’ 27-0005-1
—27-0024-1
—27-0044-1
— 27-0064-1
—27-0084-1
—
30’ 27-0006-1
—27-0025-1
—27-0045-1
—27-0065-1
—27-0085-1
—
35’ 27-0007-1
—27-0026-1
—27-0046-1
—27-0066-1
—27-0086-1
—
40’ 27-0008-1
—27-0027-1
—27-0047-1
—27-0067-1
—27-0087-1
—
45’ 27-0009-1
—27-0028-1
—27-0048-1
—27-0068-1
—27-0088-1
—
50’ 27-0010-1
—27-0029-1
—27-0049-1
—27-0069-1
—27-0089-1
—
55’ 27-0011-1
—27-0030-1
—27-0050-1
—27-0070-1
—27-0090-1
—
60’ 27-0012-1
—27-0031-1
—27-0051-1
—27-0071-1
—27-0091-1
—
65’ 27-0013-1
—27-0032-1
—27-0052-1
—27-0072-1
—27-0092-1
—
70’ 27-0014-1
—27-0033-1
—27-0053-1
—27-0073-1
—27-0093-1
—
75’ 27-0015-1
—27-0034-1
—27-0054-1
— 27-0074-1
—27-0094-1
—
80’ 27-0016-1
—27-0035-1
—27-0055-1
—27-0075-1
—27-0095-1
—
85’ 27-0017-1
—27-0036-1
—27-0056-1
—27-0076-1
—27-0096-1
—
90’ 27-0018-1
—27-0037-1
—27-0057-1
—27-0077-1
—27-0097-1
—
SHIPPED FOB:
Florida
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
423
evoporative cooling systems
Prices include: Aluminum water distribution and return,
pump, plumbing kit, evaporative cooling pads and tall pad supports
(required on 4” systems that are 60”, 72”, 84” or 96” tall)
Fans
Pads should be placed on the same side as the prevailing winds
Pads
Fansside.Fans
with fan installation on Pads
the opposite
As a general guide,
you can use the following system recommendations to insure
proper cooling:
• For 4” pad systems: Use 1 sq ft of pad per 250 CFM
• For 6” pad systems: Use 1 sq ft of pad per 400 CFM
Example: A greenhouse has 6 fans that produce 20,000 CFM
each for a total of 120,000 CFM through the house.
• 4” system: 120,000 250 = 480 sq ft of pad required
• 6” system: 120,000 400 = 300 sq ft of pad required
Setting The Standard In
Evaporative Cooling Media
Küül® pads are the highest quality rigid cooling media
on the martket today. Specifically, Küül® pads are
constructed with a heavier, virgin quality kraft paper
containing a high resin content which provides effective
and efficient cooling while giving KüüL® pads greater
durability, strength and longevity.
Küül® pads are produced using a unique, patentpending process, ensuring complete resin cure in each
sheet of kraft paper.
Küül® pads are engineered for maximum strength and
rigidity through a unique process ensuring complete
resin cure using thermal-setting resins for unmatched
structural integrity.
Black Diamond Edge Coating
• Increases longevity - most durable edge coating in the
marketplace
• Weatherproof - tough and durable for demanding agricultural
applications
• Pad Durability - Reduces or even eliminates mineral and scale
build-up and extends the life of pads
• Pad Maintenance - Allows pads to be cleaned more vigorously
and, as a result, will further resist mineral and algae build-up
and accelerated decay
• Pad Efficiency - Does not restrict water or airflow. While
increasing rigidity and durability, Black Diamond Edge Coating
allows for the most efficient and effective cooling
Kuul pads
How to Maximize Pad Life
Daily:
• Visually inspect the pads for bowing and sagging or dry streaks
• Dry the pads completely every 24 hours
• Inspect the sump tank, remove any debris and make sure the
water level is correct
• Check the water distribution system for leaks and clogged water
distributor holes
Weekly:
• Check bleed-off rate and adjust if necessary
• Check water flow rate and adjust if necessary
• Check pumps and clean any debris from the inlet
• Clean water filter
Every 4 - 6 Weeks (during operating season):
• Remove and brush pads with a soft bristle brush then flush
system to remove debris
• Drain and disinfect the entire water distribution system
General Guidelines
• A clean water distribution system is the most important aspect for
maintaining the entire evaporative cooling system. This, coupled
with quarterly inspection/maintenance checks, will ensure a
properly operating evaporative cooling system
• Do not cycle the pump. This will cause the pads to wear
out prematurely
• Use chemicals to clean and disinfect ONLY
• Only use products that are approved for use with Küül® pads
Do not use chlorine, bleach or any oxidizing agents
424
800-325-3055
Catalog
Size Number
4” x 12” x 24” 33-3740-
4” x 12” x 36” 33-3741-
4” x 12” x 48” 33-3742-
4” x 12” x 60” 33-3743-
4” x 12” x 72” 33-3744-
6” x 12” x 36” 33-3745-
6” x 12” x 48” 33-3746-
6” x 12” x 60” 33-3747-
6” x 12” x 72” 33-3748-
One Edge Coating
*4” x 12” x 24” 33-3749-
*4” x 12” x 36” 33-3750-
*4” x 12” x 48” 33-3751-
*4” x 12” x 60” 33-3752-
4” x 12” x 72” 33-3753-
6” x 12” x 36” 33-3771-
6” x 12” x 48” 33-3772-
6” x 12” x 60” 33-3773-
6” x 12” x 72” 33-3774-
Two Edge Coating
4” x 12” x 24” 33-3760-
4” x 12” x 36” 33-3761-
4” x 12” x 48” 33-3762-
4” x 12” x 60” 33-3830-
6” x 12” x 48” 33-3767-
6” x 12” x 60” 33-3765-
PC-1
1-24
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-2
25-74
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-3
75 & up
$—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
$—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
$—
—
—
—
—
—
*Check for seasonal availability for in stock shipments
SHIPPED FOB:
Texas
Your One Source For
Horticultural
Information
Hummert’s Helpful Hints
www.hummert.com • (800) 325-3055
www.hummert.com
KÜÜL® Pad Maintenance Tips
Scale Control
Algae Control
• Use Mineral/Scale prevention (J.R.’s Evaporative Cooling
Treatment or Mineral Knockout, see page 426-427)
• Maintain pH between 6 and 8. Optimal is 7
• Make sure the flow of water is even from one end of the water
spray bar to the other
• Water flow should be 1.5 gallons/minute/sq ft of top surface
area. Use plenty of bleed-off
• Use daily water bleed off rate of 3-5%
Floral Air Pads on Rolls
• Shade the pads and sump
• Allow the pads to dry out completely every 24 hours
• Prevent contaminants from contacting the pads and water.
Dust, fumes, fertilizer, phosphates, etc. provide nutrients for
algae growth
• Use an algaecide (such as Zerotol, Greenshield or Physan 20,
see page 427)
Evaporative Cooling Sump Tanks
55 gal
100 gal
155 gal
300 gal
Roll Size
Width x Length
2’ x 24’
3’ x 24’
4’ x 24’
Catalog
Number
28-9510-
28-9520-
28-9530-
PC-1
1-9
$ —
—
—
Floral Air Pads
• Made by a patented “Curlex”
process, which allows maximum
water absorption and minimum air
resistance.
• Uniformity of wood fiber distribution
is your assurance of the best
greenhouse cooling system
performance
• Floral AIr Pads are shrink-proof,
because they’re covered and stitched
with AMXCO’s exclusive plastic net
• Size: 30” x 36”
• Weight: 27lb / bundle
• Bundle of 12
Catalog
Number
28-9215-1
Price
$—
800-325-3055
PC-2
10 & up
$—
—
—
All edges have been rounded for safety and strength. If the tank gets
a small leak , it can be braze welded with a common butane torch to
fill the hole. The larger tanks feature incorporated pallet form openings
on the bottom, eliminating accident punctures while providing easy
transportation.
Evaporative cooling tank sizing:
4” system = .75 gallon x sq ft of pad system
6” system = 1 gallon x sq ft of pad system
Model
Dimensions
Wt
Catalog
No Capacity
L x W x H
(lbs) Number
Price
W-SERIES SUMP TANKS - BLACK (without lids)
$—
W-55 55 gal 51.5” x 27.5” x 13” 19 08-2150-1
W-100 100 gal 52” x 30.75” x 24” 33 08-2154-1
—
W-155 155 gal 52.5” x 46.25” x 23.5”3408-2156-1
—
W-300 300 gal
87” x 62” x 20”
91 08-2158-1
—
Sump Tank
Safety Cover
• Made of galvanized sheet metal
• Available in 3 pieces for the installation
of the plumbing package (to be fieldcut for fill and drain piping)
• Sump tank lids allow for easy
maintenance
• Ships UPS
Catalog
Capacity
Number
Price
55 Gal.
08-2170-1
$—
100 Gal.
08-2172-1
—
155 Gal.
08-2174-1
—
300 Gal.
08-2176-1 Call for Pricing
www.hummert.com
425
cooling system pads & tanks
These water tanks are rotational molded with high quality FDA
approved UV protected plastic to ensure uniform thickness and strength
for maximum durability and longevity. The one piece construction
eliminates cracking and splitting common in plastic-welded, two piece
construction tanks.
Portable Evaporative Cooling Units
A portable, evaporative cooling system that utilizes a unique, patented housing design and high
efficiency, rigid cooling media to produce effective cooling even in high relative humidity conditions.
• Cools anywhere standard A/C is ineffective
or cost prohibitive
• Cools for average hourly cost of just
7-25 ¢ depending on the unit size
• Cools up to 4,000 sq ft with the largest
unity or choose a smaller model for tight
spaces (call for information on the 4,000 sq
ft model)
• Cools instead of recirculating stale, hot air
• Cools where you need it
• Cools without freon or any chemicals, just
tap water
• Cools economically with efficient, effective
resource use
Jetstream 2400
Model PACJS2400
Jetstream 1600
Model PACJS1600
36” Variable Speed
Model PAC2K36HPVS
24” Variable Speed
Model PAC2K24HPVS
36” Three Speed
Model PAC2K363S
16” Vertical
Model PAC163SVT
port-a-cool
Port-A-Cool Portable Evaporative Cooling Units
Jetstream 1600 16” 3 Speed Jetstream 2400 24” Variable
36” Variable
36” 3 Speed
VerticalSpeedSpeed
Model Number PACJS1600 PAC163SVT
PACJS2400
PAC2K24HPVS PAC2K36HPVS PAC2K363S
Dia Fan16”16”24”24”36”36”
CFM
4,000
2,500/3,330/3,900 7,500
up to 6,700
up to 10,100
4,800/6,600/9,600
LouversAdjustable
NoAdjustable
NoNoNo
Hp/voltage/speed 1/3, 115v, var 1/2, 115v, 3-spd 1/3 hp, 115v, var 1/3, 115v, var ½, 115v, var
½, 115, 3-spd
Total run amps
5.35.39.29.211.311.5
Dual fill/hose YesNoYesNoNoNo
Water reservoir 42 gal capacity 42 gal capacity 48 gal capacity 14 gallons
32 gallons
32 gallons
Unit weight
109 lbs
130 lbs
200 lbs
155 lbs
200 lbs
205 lbs
Dimensions (H” x W” x HT”) 59x37.5x 23.5 59x37.5x 23
71.75 x 54.5 x 28 53x50x25
67x62x32
67x62x32
Cool capacity 1,000 sq ft
900 sq ft
2,000 sq ft
1,800 sq ft
2,650 sq ft
2,500 sq ft
Catalog No
33-3695- 33-3700-33-3701-33-3702-33-3704- 33-3706PC-1
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$—
1-4
PC-2
—
—
—
—
—
—
5 & up
SHIPPED FOB:
Texas
Port-A-Cool Accessories
Port-A-Cool unit
Replacement Pads
Specifications:
Description
16” & Jetstream 24” Port-A-Cool
DimensionsPads/
H x W x D
Unit
24” x 12” x 6” 3
36” x 12” x 6” 4
See page 424
for more information
on KÜÜL pads.
SHIPPED FOB:
426
Texas
800-325-3055
Description
Port-A-Filler 50 gal portable tank
8” caster kit set of 4 (24” & 36”)
Replacements casters (set of 2)
Cover for 16” vert & jetstream units
Cover for 24” & 36” units
Catalog
Number
33-3708-
33-3720-
33-3721-
33-3722-
33-3724-
PC-1
1-4
$ —
—
—
—
—
PC-2
5 & Up
$—
—
—
—
—
MK47 Mineral Knockout
Add to your port-a-cool unit to help prevent hard
water mineral build-up, protect fan components,
and extend the life of the unit.
33-3728-1 Each
33-3728-2 Case of 6
We Appreciate
Your Business
$ 42.00
235.00
Thank You!
www.hummert.com
Evaporative Cooling Water Treatment Products
Green-Shield
Physan 20 Benzylkonium Chloride
Compare to MicroBloc
ADBAC
Description: Disinfectant and algeacide
Mode of action: Disrupts cellular membranes
Labeled for: Greenhouses, nurseries,
landscapes and interiorscapes
Uses: Work areas, benches, pots, flats, cutting
tools, greenhouse glass, walkways, evaporative
coolers, decorative pools, fountains, water displays, poultry houses, farm premises, etc.
Benefits: Cost effective first step in IPM
Precautions: Toxic to fish; Signal Word: Danger;
EPA No.: 499-368
Work area: 1 tbsp per gallon and let stand 10 minutes
Pots: 1 tbsp per gallon and let stand 10 minutes
Tools: 1 teaspon per quart and let stand 10 minutes
Greenhouse glass: 1 teaspoon per gallon, let dry, then wipe
Walkways: 1 tbsp per gallon, let stand 1 hour, brush and wash, treat
again and let dry; Evaporative coolers: 1 teaspoon per 15 gal biweekly
This formulation is
not registered for
use in California.
04-0715-1 Gallon*
$—
04-0715-2 Case of 4*
—
04-0718-1 30 gallon drum†—
* Ground Ship Only
†30 gallon drum: Truck ship only
EVAPORATIVE
COOLING
TREATMENT
Physan 20
Test Strips
• Conserves water:
one quart of concentrate is used
per 25 gallons of
water in reservoir
• Two treatments per
cooling season is
recommended
30-1189-1 Quart
$—
30-1189-2 Case of 12
—
30-1190-1 Gallon
—
30-1190-2 Case of 4
—
330 Water Treatment
For use with Cool-Cell Pads, Aqua-Cell Pads,
Cel-dek Pads, Excelsior Pads, Evap Coolers and Evap
Condensers. Not a hazard, pollutant or toxic product.
Makes the air cleaner & cooler. Drastically reduces
amount of water used. Dissolves scale and rust. Stops
and prevents corrosion and bacteria odor. Reduces
maintenance and pad replacement. Cleaning: Use 3 oz
per gal of water. Maintenance: Use 1 oz per gallon
of water every
30-1191-1 Gallon
60 days.
30-1191-2 Case of 4
800-325-3055
$—
ZeroTol® 2.0
Hydrogen Dioxide &
Peroxyacetic Acid
Group - Oxidizer
$—
—
Once-Through Cleaner
Easy one-step cleaner for evaporative coolers and water lines that have salt, calcium, rust or
other mineral buildup. Similar to JR’s ECT, with
higher amounts of organic and inorganic acids
to remove buildup quickly. JR’s will protect the
metal surfaces of the cooler to prepare the cooler
and pads for better, more efficient performance.
For increased performance/maintenance, add JR’s
ECT when refilling reservoir to create a cooler
environment with cleaner air and to conserve
water usage.
This product contains organically-inhibited acids.
Do not allow to
stand on roofs, sidewalks or driveways. 30-2000-1 Quart
30-2000-2 Case of 12
Use 32 oz max in
30-2005-1 Gallon
a full reservoir of
30-2005-2 Case of 4
fresh water.
Use to determine the level of germicidal activity in a solution of Physan
20 General Greenhouse Disinfectant
and indicates when a new solution
needs to be mixed. Colorimetric,
easy-to-read and measures product
efficacy.
04-0859-1 15 strips/pack
$—
—
—
—
Description: Broad-spectrum algaecide, bactericide and fungicide
Mode of action: Oxidizes proteins
and lipids
Labeled for: Greenhouses, hydroponics, nurseries, field applications, nonporous surfaces, media drenches,
turf, soil, artificial turf
Diseases: Alternaria, anthracnose,
aphanomyces, botrytis, downy mildew, erwinia, fusarium, leaf spot,
phytophthora, plasmopara, powdery
mildew, pseudomonas, pythium, rhizoctonia, rust, scab, smut, thielaviopsis, xanthomonas, wilts, blights, ralstonia solanacearum, sclerontiia
sclerotiorum, tobacco mosaic virus
Crops: Ornamentals, turf, non-porous surfaces, trees, bulbs, cuttings,
seedlings, seeds, seedbeds, hydroponics
Benefits: Versatile and efficacious
Precautions: Hydroponic water treatment requires BioSafe water analysis before treatment can begin
Signal word: Danger; EPA No.: 70299-12
Rate: pots, tools, benches 1:100 to 1:300; Evaporative coolers: 1.25 fl oz per gallon, 1:100; foliar spray: 1:100 †
REI: 1 hour for greenhouse; 0 hour for dip, seed,
soil, mop, soak
Truck ship only
01-2200-1 2.5 gallon
$—
01-2230-1 30 gallon†—
01-2250-1
55 gallon†—
www.hummert.com
427
evaporative water treatment products
• Bio-degradable
• Non-hazardous
• ECT cleans and
prevents: rust,
scale, corrosion,
bacteria odor
• Pad replacement
• Non-pulling
Description: General disinfectant,
sanitizer, deodorizer, bactericide,
fungicide, viricide, and algaecide
for hard, inanimate surfaces
Mode of action: Disrupts cellular
membranes
Labeled for: Greenhouses, nurseries, landscapes, lawn care,
golf courses, interiorscapes,
non-porous surfaces, fountains,
swimming pools, water displays,
cutting tools, etc.
Diseases: Pseudomonas, erwinia,
agrobacterium, algae, mildew,
damping-off, anthracnose, downy
mildew, enterobacter, botrytis,
rusts, leaf spots, etc.
Crops: House plants, seeds, cuttings, trees, turf, ornamentals,
cactus, iris, orchids, etc.; Benefits: Many uses
Precautions: Not for food crops; surfaces must remain wet for
10 minutes; do not use with fish
Signal word: Danger; EPA No: 55364-5
Rate: 1 teaspoon to 04-0854-1 Pint
$—
2 tablespoons per
04-0854-2 Case of 12
—
gallon; evaporative
—
coolers: 1 teaspoon 04-0855-1Gallon
04-0855-2 Case of 4
—
in 15 gal biweekly
REI: 12 hours
04-0856-1 5 gallon
—
Humidifiers & Humidistats
Atomizing Humidifier
Model 707-U
• Humidifies 3000 cubic feet to exact degree of humidity. There is a float in
the plastic base pan to control the water level
• Output is approximately 6 gallons/day at 120°F
• Rust and corrosion resistant
• Included wire-in humidistat is easily adjustable from 20% to 80%
relative humidity
• Includes self tape saddle and wall bracket
Size: 10.5” Diameter x 12”High Weight: 13 lbs
Universal Humidistat
Model 82-1A
Easy installation – no wiring. Plug any humidifier into
the back of the humidistat plug for automatic humidity
control. Ideally suited for use with portable humidifiers. When the humidity in the installation location
drops from the selected setting, the 82-1A activates
the humidifier and allows it to operate until the humidity again reaches the desired level. The 82-1A will control humidifiers
with up to 1⁄4 hp motors. A 6 ft, three-conductor, grounded cord with a
three-prong plug is included with each unit. “On” and “Off” setting positions are provided for manual operation of the humidifier.
*Cord and plug are
not included; must
be hard wired
Humidifier* 120V
33-2500-1
$—
Humidistat
33-2510-1—
Replacement Motor w/cover33-2501-1
—
Wall Bracket (hardware not incl) 33-2502-1—
10’ Tubing
33-2503-1
—
Self Tapping Saddle Valve33-2504-1 —
Direct Feed Humidifier
Model Hydro SS-700-DF
humidifiers & humidistats
Aquafog Hydro atomizing fans are quiet, dependable and perfectly suited for
the smaller job. The Direct Feed hanging units receive liquid directly through
a visual flowmeter control panel. This provides for fine “repeatable” control
of the fogging output as well as enhancing dependability by eliminating
sump components. Direct Feed units are well suited for the harsher environment or applications where standing water in a sump could become an
issue. Each unit is equipped with a 5 ghp (20-300cc/min) flow meter panel
and 12’ condensation drainage line.
• 3 gph fogging capability
• Consumes extremely low amounts of energy
• Adjustable angle fogging head
• No-clog, nozzle-free atomization
Flowmeter
• Adjustable flow output with fog particles averaging 40 microns in size
with strainer
• 14’ power cord with grounded three prong plug
• 15’ of 1/4” water line tubing with water house connector
• Can accept water supply from any source, even ponds without the risk of clogging
• Does not require high pressure lines like other foggers
Specifications:
Fogging Capacity
0-3 gallons/hour
CFM Rating1,125
Energy Consumption 1.5 Amps @ 115V
Noise @ 10’
62 db(A)
Weight
10.5 lbs
Dimensions
16” diameter x 20.5” length
Voltage
110-128 Volts, 60Hz, 1ph
Coverage
Humidification: about 500 sq ft
Evaporative cooling: about 300 sq ft
Catalog
Model
DescriptionNumber Price
SS-700-DF Aquafogger 33-3884-1
$—
XE-36-DF Humidistat33-3861-1
—
110-250V
428
800-325-3055
Humidistat/Solenoid Control
Model XE-36-DF
This pre-wired humidistat combination
water solenoid, is an ideal means of control
for the Hydro 700 Direct Feed unit in all
applications requiring 85% or less relative
humidity.
Automatically controls both the electrical
and water supply for the Direct Feed units.
Ideal for most humidification and indoor
cooling applications, it incorporates a fastacting man-made sensing element with
large easy access control dial. Designed to
endure high humidity levels, this control unit requires no wiring and comes
supplied with a convenient 8’ pre-wired piggy-back electrical plug.
SHIPPED FOB:
Pennsylvania
www.hummert.com
Turbo XE Fogging Fans
• Aquafog units produce small particles averaging 25 microns in
size and feature flow control for adjusting the amount of liquid
being fed to the fogging fan. At rates near full capacity, 95% of the
particles produced are small enough to stay airborne
• Uses ordinary water and power supply to produce high quality,
high volume fog without clogging
• Fans can be stationary or equipped with oscillation
• Excellent for safe, effective chemical fogging. used for liquid pesticide and fungicide application, insecticide use and foliar feedings
• Capable of continuous duty operation
• All fans are standard-equipped with a dark teal housing and a dual
voltage, white epoxy painted Baldor Wash Down Duty Motors
(WDD) motor 115/230V, 1 ph, 60Hz, designed to give the best protection in moist, humid environments
Included with every fan:
• Adjustable-angle hanging basket
• Choice of visual flowmeter panel with strainer
• 12’ SJO indoor/outdoor, heavy-duty power cord
• 20’ Poly-Flo water line tubing
• 16’ water drainage line
• 100% stainless steel hardware
• Easy-to-follow operator’s manual
Model
XE-500 XE-1000XE-2000
Propulsion Distance
25’
30’
35’
Average Coverage
25’-45’
30’-60’
34’-70’
12 GPH
20 GPH
30 GPH
Max. Dry Fog Output
1/4 HP*
1/2 HP
1 HP
Motor
7.4 Amps
7.4 Amps
10.6 Amps
Energy Consumption
@ 120V
@ 120V
@ 120V
2,160
2,730
3,260
CFM Rating
Noise @ 10’
68-72 dB(A) 74-77 dB(A) 76-79 dB(A)
Weight
40 lbs
39 lbs
50 lbs
Catalog Number
33-3880-1 33-3881-133-3882-1
Price
$ —
$ —
$—
*XE-500 comes with a 1/2 HP motor and a 1.4 HP fan blade assembly
Model XE 1000 with Oscillator
Humidifying and Cooling
Poinsettia Crop
Flowmeter
Application
Guidelines
Fallout
4-34
GPH
Requiring up to
maximum fogging outputs
Light
2-6%
2-24
GPH
Requiring high
fogging output,
misty/fog
Very
Light
1-4%
1-11
GPH
Requiring a dry
mist/fog
Dry
0-2%
Very Dry
0-1%
20-300
cc/min
Requiring a
foggy/vapor
10-110
cc/min
Requiring dry
vapor up to 2
GPH
Vapor
0%
5-50 cc/
min
Requiring dry
vapor up to 1
GPH
Vapor
0%
Model Description
XE-360
Oscillator
H2-120
Humidistat control
TH1-120 Thermostat control
SV-115V 1/4” Asco solenoid valve
SHIPPED FOB:
Possible
Mist
Catalog
NumberPrice
33-3886-1
$—
33-3887-1
—
33-3885-1
—
33-3888-1
—
Turbo XE Oscillator
XE-360
• Maximum coverage
of up to 70’ diameter
• Uniform fog dispersion
• Rapid arc setting
fogging fans
Volume
Range
• Manual override
• Dwell-free design
• 4 up to 360 rotations
in 2 minutes
• 115 volt to 60/50Hz
1Ph
Humidistat Controls
H2-120
If your humidity requirement is 85% or under
the Humidistat Control offers the best overall
control. When the humidity level drops to about
7% below the set point, the humidistat will activate to replenish the loss of humidity. Capable of
operating up to 2 - 1HP units. 115V 60/50Hz
Thermostat Control
TH1-120
This thermostat will provide accurate measurement of the temperature, automatically controlling your Aquafog unit at approxiumately
3F above and below your desired set point.
Control units are assembled with high quality
waterproof components. Capable of operating
a single Aquafog unit up to 1 HP. 115V 60/50Hz
Pennsylvania
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
429
FOGCO
Greenhouse
Climate Control
FOGCO mist systems and misting pumps
are fast becoming standard equipment
for all greenhouse climate control applications. As an environmental control
system, they can have a dramatic effect
on greenhouse productivity.
Greenhouse productivity is dependent on
many factors. A line misting system cannot control or affect all variables, but it
can have a positive impact by regulating
the temperature, humidity and moisture
content within the greenhouse.
This capability will promote increased
health and productivity within the greenhouse by eliminating ‘plant water stress’,
one of the most significant factors in the
growth of all plants.
Plants lose their moisture through evaporation from the leaves. They also gather
carbon needed for growth in the form
of carbon dioxide through the leaves.
By controlling the plants pores through
the use of a properly designed misting
system, the results are stronger and
healthier plants with optimum growth
potential.
These cleanable mist nozzles are available in
sizes from .006″ to .020″ orifice. All cleanable
nozzles include an anti drip adapter. This range
is available in brass with a stainless steel orifice
or an all stainless steel design. Flow rates vary
from .01 gpm to .045 gpm with spray patterns
from 45 degrees to 85 degrees. Larger orifice
sizes and different threads are also available as
special order items.
fog systems
Fog systems can also be used to introduce fertilizers by injecting nutrients
directly into the atmosphere. The moisture and the nutrients are absorbed by
the leaves of the plant
Professional Direct Drive Pump
Filter Inlet
Filter Outlet
Pressure
Regulator
Filter
Bracket
Pump
Outlet
Inlet
Solenoid
Valve
On/Off
Switch
By-pass
Hose
Oil Drain
Plug
Thermal Relief Valve
SHIPPED FOB:
Arizona
Benefits of using greenhouse misting systems are healthy plants,
improved propagation and germination processes, reduced energy
costs, and more consistent cooling than that provided by conventional
fan systems.
Contact Hummert’s Greenhouse Sales and Design Department for a custom designed fog system.
430
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
Evaporative Air Coolers
Champion Cooler Company makes a complete line of residential
and commercial evaporative coolers built for high performance,
easy installation and low maintenance. Before any cooler is
shipped, it must pass performance tests and meet quality control
standards to earn the mark of a “Champion”.
CHAMPION COOLER’S PROVIDE:
Dependability
• Unique Rust-Free Bottom Pan – The one-piece bottom pan
prevents corrosion and leakage since the need for seams, spot
welding and sealing materials is eliminated.
• Weather & Impact Resistant – Heavy-gauge galvanized steel
metal cabinets are built to last and are tough enough to resist
weather and impact.
• Protective Interior & Exterior Coating – All metal surfaces
are coated with an electrostatically-applied, UV-stabilized polyester
powder finish for a beautiful appearance and protection from
moisture, chalking and discoloration.
Performance
• Maximum Cooling Comfort – the high performance water
pump ensures even water delivery to the evaporative media.
• Easy Access – versatile, bolted construction allows for easy
access for parts replacement and provides greater resistance to
rust since the need for welding is eliminated.
• Easy-to-Access Components – The easy-to-remove steel pad
frame provides quick and easy access to the cooler interior.
• Quiet Performance – The machine-balanced blower wheel
ensures quiet operation and maximum air flow even when your
cooler is working its hardest.
Side Discharge Models
Actual CFM
Model
Motor @.1” STATIC
Number Number
Pressure
HP
Speed Volt
D=HtE=Wdth A=Ht B=WdthC=Dpth Shipping Operating
3000SD
3000SD
4001SD
4001SD
4001SD
4001SD
5000SD
5000SD
5000SD
5000SD
5000SD
13
13
17
17
17
17
19
19
19
19
19
110444
110445
110444
110445
110446
110447
110446
110447
110448
110449
110480
1950
1950
2726
2726
3230
3230
3910
3910
4600
4600
4600
1/3
1/3
1/3
1/3
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
230
Duct OpeningCabinet DimensionsWeight LbsCatalog
⁄813
5
⁄813
3
⁄417
3
⁄417
3
⁄417
3
⁄417
3
⁄419
3
⁄419
3
⁄419
3
⁄419
3
⁄419
5
⁄833 7⁄1628 1⁄828 1⁄8
109
5
⁄833 7⁄1628 1⁄828 1⁄8109
3
⁄434 1⁄234 1⁄834 1⁄8150
3
⁄434 1⁄234 1⁄834 1⁄8150
3
⁄434 1⁄234 1⁄834 1⁄8150
3
⁄434 1⁄234 1⁄834 1⁄8150
3
⁄442 7⁄16 39 39 202
3
⁄442 7⁄16 39 39 202
3
⁄442 7⁄16 39 39 202
3
⁄442 7⁄16 39 39 202
3
⁄442 7⁄16 39 39 202
5
Number
Price
193
33-1700-1
193 33-1703-1
269 33-1706-1
269 33-1709-1
269 33-1712-1
269 33-1715-1
35733-1724-1
35733-1727-1
35733-1730-1
35733-1732-1
35733-1780-1
$—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
evaporative air coolers
Aspen Pads
Replacement Motors Only (Single Phase)
Part
HP Volts SPD
RPM
Number
1/3 115
1
1725 110444
1/3 115 2 1725/1140110445
1/2 115 1
1725110446
1/2 115 2 1725/1140110447
3/4 *
1
1725110455
3/4 115 1
1725110448
3/4 115 2 1725/1140110449
3/4 230 2 1725/1140110480
1 115 2 1725/1140110471
1 230 2 1725/1140110458
*115/208/230
SHIPPED FOB:
Catalog
Number
Price
33-1896-1 $ —
33-1898-1 —
33-1900-1 —
33-1902-1 —
33-1903-1 —
33-1904-1 —
33-1905-1 —
33-1906-1 —
33-1907-1 —
33-1909-1 —
QuantityCatalog
Model
Size
Fits
Per Unit Number
110091 22” x 27”
3000SD
3
33-2004-1
11009827 1⁄2” x 27 3⁄4” 4001SD
4
33-2006-1
11009232 3⁄4” x 36 1⁄4” 5000SD
3
33-2008-1
Price
$—
—
—
Replacement Parts
FL-C
290998
Float Valve Assembly
Sand color touch up paint
1/4”
6 oz
33-3310-1
33-3315-1
$—
—
PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE
While the prices listed are always current at the time of publication, they
do change over the time frame of our catalog. To alleviate any
problems this may cause, please call for current pricing or visit our website
Texas
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
431
Complete Cooling Systems
•Ready to install unit includes motor,
pump and purge pump
•Most powerful coolers on the market
• Unique perforated air inlet screen provides more airflow than competition
•UL classified and made in the USA
•High-performance rigid media- available in two sizes- 8” and 12” for total
cooling comfort
•Energy efficient savings- uses up to
75% less electricity than conventional
air conditioners
•Resists impact of weather - tough powder coated finish inside and out on all
metal surfaces
•Unique engineered thermoplastic reservoir prevents corrosion
•Best warranty - limited lifetime warranty on cabinet against leakage due
to rust out
Duct
Cabinet Weight
Model
Motor
ActualOpening
Dimensions
Lbs
Catalog
Price
Number Number Width CFM* HP Speed Volt
A
B
Height WidthDepth ShippingOperating Number
AS1C51
110449
8”
3630 3/4
2
115
17 3⁄417 3⁄4
28
4245
184 233 33-1802-1
$—
AS2C51
110480
8”
3630 3/4
2
230
17 3⁄417 3⁄4
28
4245
184 233 33-1806-1
—
AS1C71
110471
8”
4820
1
2
115
19 3⁄419 3⁄434 5⁄8 4248
220 269 33-1804-1
—
AS2C71
110458
8”
4820
1
2
230
19 3⁄419 3⁄434 5⁄8 4248
220 269 33-1808-1
—
AS1C51-12 110449 12” 3472 3/4
2
115
17 3⁄417 3⁄4
28
4249
204 263 33-1810-1
—
AS2C51-12 110480 12” 3472 3/4
2
230
17 3⁄417 3⁄4
28
4249
204 263 33-1814-1
—
AS1C71-12 110471 12” 4747
1
2
115
19 3⁄419 3⁄434 5⁄8 4252
246 306 33-1812-1
—
AS2C71-12 110458 12” 4747
1
2
230
19 3⁄419 3⁄434 5⁄8 4252
246 306 33-1816-1
—
* Actual CFM based on 0.10” Static Pressure
Separate
Wet Section
Evaporative air coolers
Mesh
Prefilter
Screen
Evaporative
Media
2 YEAR
LIMITED
WARRANTY
Water
Distribution
Pump
UL Recognized
Thermally
Protected
2 YEAR
Water
LIMITED
Reservior
Prevents corrosion. WARRANTY
Removable. Easy-to-clean
LIMITED LIFETIME
WARRANTY
Moisture
Shield
Motor
Thermally protected
High torque
Dependable
2 YEAR
LIMITED WARRANTY
Inspection Panel
Easy accessibility
to interior for
cleaning and
maintenance
Float
Valve
Bleed Off
Reduces
maintenance
by keeping
water fresh
and clean
Blower
Wheel
Cabinet
Ultra strong galvanized
steel construction
Painted Exterior
The bond between metal &
coating eliminates the need
for priming & undercoating
Meets 1,000 hour salt spray
test per ASTM B-117 standard
COOLER ACCESSORIES
Catalog
DescriptionNumber
Each
Cooler Stand Kit
33-1010-1
$—
Aluminum Ductwork 33-3220-1
Call for pricing
Motorized Shutters See page 413
H av e a
Great
D ay !
Cooler Stand Kit
432
800-325-3055
Aluminum
Ductwork
SHIPPED FOB:
www.hummert.com
Texas
Gas-Fired Unit Heaters
Effinity 93 - 93% Efficiency Condensing
Effinity93® (model PTC) condensing unit heater line is the most
efficient gas-fired, condensing unit heater in North America.
93% EFFICIENT. This industry leading efficiency is a result
of coupling Modine’s Conservicore® secondly heat exchanger
technology with Modine’s robust tubular primary heat exchanger
design. The Conservicore® technology features a secondary
recuperative heat exchanger fabricated from AL29-4C stainless steel.
This material is superior to other lower grades of stainless steel
and aluminum resulting in outstanding ability to withstand the
corrosive environment of condensing gas fired equipment. The separated combustion units draw combustion air from outside
to ensure that the unit will always have plenty of fresh, clean air
for combustion while increasing the overall heating efficiency.
Venting material to be used is PVC, an extremely cost effective
vent system.
Annual Gas Saving from Two Effinity93 Models
versus Comparable Power-Vented and
Gravity-Vented Gas Fired Unit Heaters*
City
Boston, MA
Chicago, IL
Oklahoma City, OK
Louisville, KY
Minneapolis, MN
Seattle, WA
PTC 215
(215,000 BTU/hr)
PowerGravityvented
vented
$ 714
$ 1,600
$ 756
$ 1,694
$ 542
$ 1,215
$ 563
$ 1,262
$ 747
$ 1,673
$ 736
$ 1,648
PTC 260
(260,000 BTU/hr)
PowerGravityvented
vented
$ 864
$ 1,934
$ 914
$ 2,048
$ 656
$ 1,469
$ 681
$ 1,526
$ 903
$ 2,024
$ 890
$ 1,993
• Modine’s Conservicore Technology® features a high-grade stainless steel secondary heat exchanger built to withstand acidic condensate
Designed for faster installation and lower
installation costs
• Ability to be vented as either two-pipe or concentric vent system
with 3” and 4” PVC vent pipe for quick, flexible and cost effective
installations
• Delivers 93% efficiency in the same compact box sizes as Modine’s 80% efficient models
Modine
Conservicore
Heat Exchanger
Model PTC - General Performance Data
Model
55 65 85 110135155 180215260310
BTU/Hr Input55,000 65,000 85,000 110,000135,000156,000 180,000 215,000260,000310,000
BTU/Hr Output
51,150 60,450 79,050 102,300125,550144,150 167,400 199,950241,800288,300
Condensate
0.30.40.50.71.01.1 1.3 1.61.92.3
Prod (Gal/HR)
Entering Airflow
1,0991,1411,6501,9502,1602,510 3,020 3.8654,5855,400
(CFM) @ 70F
Outlet Velocity
618650619668719835 676 699831765
(FPM)
Air Temp Rise
434944545453 51 484949
Max Mounting 121213131417 15 172019
Height (Ft)
Heat Throw (Ft) 434348465159 53 607067
@ Max Mtg Ht
Motor Type
PSCPSCPSCPSCPSCPSC PSC PSCPSCPSC
Motor HP1/81/81/81/21/31/3 1/3 1/23/43/4
Motor RPM
144014401550107510751075 1075 107511251125
Catalog # 34-120034-1202 34-1204 34-1206 34-0700-34-0702- 34-0704-34-0706-34-0708-34-0710PC-1
$—
$ —
$—
$—
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$—
1-4
PC-2 —
—
—
—
— —— —— —
5 & up
See Page 436 for further information and pricing on Modine’s Effinity condensate handling accessories and horizontal concentric and vertical vent kits.
SHIPPED FOB:
Buena Vista, VA
When ordering PTC specify type of fuel – natural or propane gas, main power supply to the unit, heat exchanger material –
aluminized or 409 stainless and altitude at which unit is to be installed.
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
433
Modine unit heaters
*Savings are realized by comparing the Effinity93 BTU/hr Output to
78% seasonally efficient power-vented. Savings were determined by
applying appropriate degree days at 65 degrees indoor design temperature under full year, 24/7 operation to each city’s 2012 average
price/therm of gas.
Modine exclusive Conservicore Technology®
relieves fear of failure
Gas-Fired Unit Heaters
Horizontal Power Vented
In Stock
St Louis
Warehouse
Model PTP
Stainless Heat Exchanger
From St.Louis Stock
Model BTU/HrBTU/Hr Catalog
NumberInput1 Output1 Number
PTP150 150,000120,000 34-0500-
PTP175 175,000140,000 34-0510-
PTP200 200,000160,000 34-0520-
PTP250 250,000200,000 34-0530-
PTP300 300,000240,000 34-0540-
PTP350 350,000280,000 34-0550-
PTP400 400,000320,000 34-0560-
• The PTP features a stainless steel heat exchanger that comes STANDARD on
all units to withstand corrosive combustion air found inside a greenhouse,
extending the life of your investment
• 10-year heat exchanger warranty is standard, providing you peace of mind
• The PTP utilizes Modine’s proven tubular heat exchanger design
• Original finger-proof fan guard for low mounting height applications
• LP gas can be supplied at no additional charge on heaters shipped FOB
manufacturer. Call for Propane catalog numbers. See page 436 for vent
stacking
PC-1
1-4
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-2
5 & up
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ratings shown are for elevations up to 2,000 ft. For elevations
above 2,000 ft, reduces at the rate of 4% for each 1,000 ft above
seal level. (In Canada see rating plate) Reduction of ratings
requires use of a high altitude kit.
2
Data taken at 55°F air temperature rise. At 65°F ambient and
unit fired at full-rated input. Mounting height as measured from
bottom of unit, and without deflector hoods.
1
In Stock
St Louis
Warehouse
Modine gas fired heaters
Hot Dawg® Power-Exhausted
Gas-Fired Unit Heater (Model HD)
• Hush-puppy quiet operation
• Right or left hand controls available
on all 30-75 units. Gas, electrical and flue connections can be
changed by simply flipping the Hot
Dawg over
• Uses natural gas; propane available as special order call for more
information
• Lightweight, easily installs 1” from
roof with only two angle brackets
(included on sizes 30-75, accessory
for 100, 125)
• Full 10-year warranty on heat
exchanger
Add for LP
Conversion Kit
(Stocked Heaters Only)
Catalog PC-1
Number
1-4
34-1208-
$—
34-1210-
—
34-1212-
—
34-1214-
—
34-1216-
—
34-1218-
—
34-1220-
—
• Standard power exhaust simplifies side-wall or roof venting with
small-diameter vent pipe
• Permanently-lubricated motor for
trouble-free dependability
• Controls are single stage, direct
spark ignition, 100% shut-off, with
continuous retry. Two stage also
available, call for more information
• Low-profile design and natural
color to blend
Performance
Model HD
Btu/Hr Input
30,00045,00060,00075,000100,000 125,000
30456075100125
Btu/Hr Output
24,00036,00048,00060,000 80,000 100,000
Mounting height is measured from floor to bottom of unit.
Entering Airflow (CFM) @ 70ºF
505
BTU rating shown for elevations up to 2,000 sq ft.
523749653769 565 747
For elevations above 2,000 feet, ratings should be reduced
at the rate of 4% for each 1,000 feet above see level.
Maximum Mounting Height
10’
10’
12’
14’
12’
16’
Reduction of ratings require use of a high altitude kit.
Heat Throw (@ Max mtg ht)
25’
27’
36’
38’
42’
56’
SP
SP
PSC
PSC
SP
PSC
LP gas can be supplied at no additional charge on heaters
shipped FOB manufacturer. Call for Propane catalog numbers. See page 436 for vent stacking sizes.
HD Stainless Heat Exchanger
From St Louis Stock
Outlet Velocity
Air Temp Rise (ºF)
Motor Type
Motor HP
Add for LP Conversion Kit
(Stocked Heaters Only)
Model CatalogPC-1 PC-2 Catalog
NumberNumber 1-4
5 & Up
Number
*HD30S 34-1620-
$ —$ — 34-1690-1
*HD45S 34-1622-
——34-1690-1
HD60S 34-1623-
——34-1690-1
HD75S 34-1624-
——34-1690-1
HD100S 34-1626-
—
— 34-1691-1
HD125S 34-1628-
—
— 34-1692-1
PC-1
1-4
$—
—
—
—
—
—
44
720
46
990
45
1160
1490
48
1980
50
1/151/151/121/12 1/12
HD Aluminized Heat Exchanger
FOB Buena Vista, VA
Model CatalogPC-1 PC-2
NumberNumber 1-4
5 & Up
HD30A34-1600-
$ —$ —
HD45A34-1602-
—
—
HD60A34-1604-
—
—
HD75A34-1606-
—
—
HD100A34-1612-
—
—
HD125A34-1614-
—
—
*
434
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
47
1/8
Gas-Fired Unit Heaters
Separated Combustion
Hot Dawg® Separated Combustion
Gas-Fired Unit Heater (Model HDS)
Model HDS - General Performance Data
Model
HDS30HDS45HDS60HDS75HDS100HDS125
BTU/Hr Input
30,00045,00060,00075,000 100,000
125,000
BTU/Hr Output
24,00036,00048,00060,000 80,000100,000
Max Mounting
10101214 1216
Height (ft)
Heat Throw (ft)
25273638 4256
@ Max. Mtg Ht
• Draws combustion air from outside the
work space, ensuring the unit always has
plenty of fresh, clean air to breathe
• The fresh air supply reduces common
concerns about dusty, dirty or humid
applications, providing greater durability
and reduced maintenance
• Factory assembled, certified separated
combustion saves installation time
• LP gas can be supplied at no additional
charge. Call for Propane catalog numbers. See page 436 for vent stacking
HDS Aluminized Heat Exchanger
Catalog # 34-1630-34-1632-34-1633-34-1634- 34-1636- 34-1638PC-1
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$—
1-4
PC-2 ——— — — —
5 & up
HDS Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger
Catalog # 34-1640-34-1642-34-1643-34-1644- 34-1646- 34-1648PC-1
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$—
1-4
PC-2
—
—
—
—
—
—
5 & up
SHIPPED FOB:
Prepaid Freight Modine Heaters 1,000 lbs or more
Buena Vista, VA
These unit heaters are specifically designed
for buildings with difficult atmospheric conditions, such as chemicals, high humidity or
negative pressure, as in modern greenhouses.
Combustion air is brought in from outdoors.
Modine’s unique design also minimizes resistive losses, resulting in greater heat throw and
lower motor horsepower requirements.
These unit heaters employ a non-condensing recuperative heat-exchanger design to
reclaim additional flue-gas heat prior to expelling the gases from the building. Available in
either propeller or blower models. Sealed compartment protects combination gas control,
ignition control, manifold and burner.
• 100% outside air for combustion
• Available in natural gas or propane
• Stainless-steel secondary heat-exchanger tubes
• 82% thermally efficient = 20%+ fuel savings versus gravity-vented products
• Horizontal or vertical concentric venting
• Single-stage, intermittent pilot ignition,
100% shut-off with continuous retry
Model PTS - General Performance Data
Model
PTS 150S PTS 175S PTS 200S PTS 250S PTS 300S PTS 350S PTS 400S
BTU/Hr Input150,000175,000200,000250,000 300,000350,000 400,000
BTU/Hr Output
120,000140,000160,000200,000 240,000280,000 320,000
Vent Diameter
4”4”4”4” 6”6” 6”
CFM @70F2,1402,7253,0153,995 4,5455,280 5,995
Air Temp Rise (F) 53
48
50
47
50
50
51
Max Mounting
15’14’15’18’ 19’18’ 21’
Height
Motor HP
1/61/61/61/3 1/21/2 3/4
Catalog # 34-0605-34-0610-34-0612-34-0615- 34-0620- 34-0625- 34-0650PC-1
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$—
1-4
PC-2 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
5 & up
SHIPPED FOB:
800-325-3055
Modine offers a variety
of Greenhouse Heating
Solutions to fit any
greenhouse’s needs.
From 93% efficient condensing unit to infrared
heaters for loading docks
and doorways. Modine has the right
heater for your greenhouse application.
Hummert International
has the team to design
one greenhouse or acres
of greenhouses and the
construction team to
build them. Please call
for more information.
LP gas can be supplied
at no additional charge.
Call for Propane catalog
numbers. See page 436
for vent stacking sizes.
Buena Vista, VA
www.hummert.com
435
Modine gas-fired heaters
Model PTS
Gas-Fired Unit Heaters
Vertical Power Vented
Model PDP
The PDP (propeller) and BDP (blower) High Efficiency II gas-fired unit heaters are a
generation of products that are inexpensive to install, easy to use, and offer excellent
service economy.
• 80% thermal efficiency, maximizing seasonal efficiency through the use of a collector
box and the power exhauster
• Available in aluminized 20-gauge steel or
optional stainless steel heat exchanger to resist rust and corrosion for longer life
• 22-gauge cold-rolled steel case comes with
completely baked on, painted outer panels
• Burner can be easily removed for fast service.
Available in aluminized or stainless steel.
• A power exhaust that can be rotated 180°.
Unit can be vented vertically or horizontally
• A 100% shut-off, intermittent pilot-ignition
system with continuous retry, at no extra
charge. This ignition system allows for all
PDP/BDP units to be field-converted to propane, if desired
Modine heating units
Stainless Heat Exchanger
Max
Heat Throw
BTU/Hr BTU/Hr Mtg (@ max
Model
Input Output ht
mtg ht)
PDP150150,000120,000 16’
55’
PDP175175,000140,000 17’
59’
PDP200200,000160,000 15’
51’
PDP250250,000200,000 19’
67’
PDP300300,000240,000 21’
74’
PDP350350,000280,000 20’
70’
PDP400400,000320,000 19’
69’
FOB Buena Vista, VA
Catalog
PC-1
PC-2
Number
1-4
5 & up
34-0150-$ —$ —
34-0180-
—
—
34-0205-
—
—
34-0255-
—
—
34-0305-
—
—
34-0355-
—
—
34-0405-
—
—
MODINE OIL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST
Horizontal Vent Stacking
For Modine Power Venter
Unit Heaters
Kits include: 2 pieces of 1’ straight pipe, 90 degree elbow, tee with
drip leg and cap, 3’ straight pipe, wall flashings, storm collars, support brackets and cap. All stacking is insulated Metal-Fab® “B” vent. Special “Breidert or Gary Steel” caps can be ordered separately if
remaining system is to be supplied “by others”.
Kits are shipped F.O.B. Hummert’s warehouse –
Earth City, MO
Heater Model Number
VentCatalog
Size Number
HD30, HD45, HD60, HD75
3”34-9903-1
HD100, HD125, PTP 150-200 4”34-9904-1
PDP150, PDP175, PDP200
5”34-9905-1
PDP250, PDP300, PTP 250-4006” 34-9906-1
PDP350, PDP400
7”34-9907-1
436
800-325-3055
Price
$—
—
—
—
—
• A safety pressure-switch to assure safe
venting conditions
• Designed to utilize the smallest-diameter
vent pipe possible
• Standard safety fan guards formed from
heavy rod stock
• PDP models are designed to operate against
0.5” of external static pressure
• “Wing” screws so that the bottom pan can be
dropped without a screwdriver or nut driver
• A level hanging mechanism for easy field
adjustments after adding accessories that
may change the unit’s center of gravity
• Catalog numbers set for natural gas
• Please call for more information
Aluminized Heat
Exchanger
FOB Buena Vista, VA
Catalog
Number
34-0147-
34-0177-
34-0202-
34-0252-
34-0302-
34-0352-
34-0402-
PC-1
1-4
$—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*
Effinity 93 Vent Stacking
Condensate Handling Accessories*
pH Neutralizing Kit*
Recharge Kit for pH Neutralizing Kit*
Note:
Heaters shipped FOB manufacturer can be set for LP
gas at no additional charge.
Call for propane catalog
numbers. Please call or fax
for other options including
control systems, voltages,
and stainless steel burners
or heat exchangers, etc.
See below for vent stacking
kits.
Catalog
Number
34-0721-
34-0722-
Horizontal Concentric Vent Kit
For Model 135* 34-0723-
For Model 156* 34-0724-
For Model 180* 34-0725-
For Model 215* 34-0726-
For Model 260* 34-0727-
For Model 310* 34-0728-
Vertical Vent Kit
For Model 135* 34-0735-
For Model 156* 34-0736-
For Model 180* 34-0737-
For Model 215* 34-0738-
For Model 260* 34-0739-
For Model 310 34-0740-
PC-1
1-4
PC-2
5 & Up
$—
—
$—
—
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
$—
—
—
—
—
—
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
$—
—
—
—
—
—
We Appreciate
Your Business
Thank
You!
www.hummert.com
Electric Unit Heaters
Horizontal Delivery
MOTOR – The totally enclosed, thermally protected,
continuous-duty motor is specially mounted for
quiet operation and extended service life. Motor is
selected to match fan requirements.
FAN – The large-bladed, lightweight aluminum fan
is connected directly to the motor shaft, and is both
dynamically and statically balanced.
HEATING ELEMENTS – For maximum heat
transfer and longer life, the sheathed nichrome wire
heating elements are spirally wound and staggered
within the unit to provide even air distribution.
fan & air
Heating Cap
Delivery
Hot Air
Model
Number KW BTU/Hr CFM
Throw
HER-50
5 17,100 530
14’
5 17,100 530
14’
HER-50
HER-75 7.5 25,600 530
14’
HER-75 7.5 25,600 530
14’
20’
HER-100 10 34,100 830
HER-100 10 34,100 830
20’
20’
HER-125 12.5 42,700 830
HER-150 15 51,200 830
20’
HER-200 20 68,200 1300
25’
HER-250 25 85,300 1300
25’
SAFETY FAN GUARD – Formed from heavy rod
stock, the fan guard eliminates the hazards of an
exposed fan. Resiliently mounted to the unit casing,
the guard provides a rigid support for the motor.
AUTOMATIC RESETTING OVERHEAT
CONTROL – Interrupts power to heating elements
in event of overheating and automatically resets
itself.
FOB Factory Buena
Vista, VA
Electrical DATA
DIMENSIONS
Power
Total Amps
Approx Catalog
Supply 60 Hz
(Approx.) Height Width Depth Ship Wt Number
Price
240V-1PH
21.3
20 7/8" 16 7/8" 14 3/4" 52 lbs 34-1700-1
$—
240V-3PH
12.5
20 7/8" 16 7/8" 14 3/4" 52 lbs 34-1701-1
—
240V-1PH
31.7
20 7/8" 16 7/8" 14 3/4" 52 lbs 34-1702-1
—
240V-3PH
18.5
20 7/8" 16 7/8" 14 3/4" 52 lbs 34-1703-1
—
240V-1PH
42.9
20 7/8" 16 7/8" 14 3/4" 67 lbs 34-1704-1
—
240V-3PH
25.3
20 7/8" 16 7/8" 14 3/4" 67 lbs 34-1705-1
—
240V-3PH
31.4
20 7/8" 16 7/8" 14 3/4" 65 lbs 34-1706-1
—
240V-3PH
37.4
20 7/8" 16 7/8" 14 3/4" 74 lbs 34-1708-1
—
240V-3PH
49.4
24" 18 7/8" 20"
97 lbs 34-1710-1
—
240V-3PH
61.4
24" 18 7/8" 20"
98 lbs 34-1712-1
—
Prices
for other
voltages
available
on request
please
Contact the
greenhouse
department
Steam/Hot Water Unit Heaters
Energy Knight® PTAC Series/
Heating - Air Condition Units
Energy Efficient—and Packed with Features! Energy
Knight® Packaged Terminal Heating - A/C units provide year round
comfort, for such applications as greenhouses, sunrooms, out buildings and greenhouse business
offices. They combine attractive
appearance with state-of-the-art
technology to minimize energy
usage while ensuring comfortable
working areas.
UL, CUL, and ARI approval.
LIMITED (ONE YEAR) PARTS and
LABOR
Features
• Fan sampling maintains a uniform temperature throughout the
area without constant adjustments of the thermostat
• Filtered ventilation air reduces dust and pollutants
• All controls are clearly labeled and easy to understand
• These units are designed for remote mounted thermostats
• Serviceability is enhanced by LED diagnostics and easy-access
components; the filter can be changed or cleaned without removing the front panel
800-325-3055
HC Models
HS Models
FOB Buena Vista, VA
Side Connection
Top/Bottom Connections
Model Catalog
Model
Catalog
Price Shipping
Number Number
Number Number BTU/HR Each Wt/Lbs
Call for proper BTU size
(800) 325-3055
HC18S01 34-1750-1 HSB18S01 34-1770-1
HC24S01 34-1751-1HSB24S01 34-1771-1
HC33S01 34-1752-1HSB33S01 34-1772-1
HC47S01 34-1753-1HSB47S01 34-1773-1
HC63S01 34-1754-1HSB63S01 34-1774-1
HC86S01 34-1755-1HSB86S01 34-1775-1
HC108S0134-1756-1 HSB108S01 34-1776-1
HC121S0134-1757-1 HSB121S01 34-1777-1
HC165S0134-1758-1 HSB165S01 34-1778-1
HC193S0134-1759-1 HSB193S01 34-1779-1
HC258S0134-1760-1 HSB258S01 34-1780-1
HC290S0134-1761-1 HSB290S01 34-1781-1
HC340S0134-1762-1 HSB340S01 34-1782-1
$ —
16
—
20
—
34
—
36
—
48
—
52
—
74
—
76
—
92
—
98
— 162
— 168
— 176
Above Prices shipped FOB Factory (Buena Vista, VA).
Call or fax for other options, voltage, or models.
Air conditioning models with Electric Heat – 230V
Model
BTUH
Catalog Number
EKTC07
6,980 7,700
34-2501-1
EKTC09
8,9009,000 34-2506-1
EKTC12
11,90012,000 34-2511-1
EKTC15
13,95015,000 34-2516-1
Price
$—
—
—
—
Heat
Pump Models with electric heat - 230v
Reverse Cycle
Cooling
Heat BTUH Catalog
Model
BTUH
@ 47º F
Number
Price
EKTH07
6,800 7,000
6,100 6,300
34-2521-1
$—
EKTH09
8,900 9,100
7,900 8,100
34-2526-1
—
EKTH12
11,800 12,000 10,500 10,700
34-2531-1
—
EKTH15
13,900 14,000 13,600 13,800
34-2536-1
—
Other voltages available. Call for pricing.
Required parts for all new units above
Model
Description
Catalog Number
Price
AWS900DWall Sleeve, Insulated
34-2550-1
$—
AGK01CB
Architectural Exterior
Grill, Aluminum
34-2555-1
—
SHIPPED FOB:
Jackson, MI
www.hummert.com
437
Modine heating units
Connections - Female type permits direct connection of unit heater
to the piping & eliminates the need for additional fittings.
vertical fins - Less opportunity for the dust & dirt to collect.
Reduces cleaning. Fins die-formed for added strength & heat transfer.
coil - All air passes through coil. Heating is uniform. Design assures
maximum control over air delivery & temperature of air leaving the
heater. Aluminum fins die-form for added strength—increased heat
transfer. Fins mechanically bonded to serpentine copper tube.
motor - All motors are totally enclosed. Single phase & explosionproof types include built in thermal overload protection. Built by reputable
manufacturers to NEMA standards. Selected & tested for operation on
specific unit heater models. All motor wiring is terminated in an electrical
junction box either supplied on the unit heater casing, or as an integral
part of the motor.
fan - Lightweight. Blades accurately balanced & pitched to move air
quietly & positively—with minimum power requirement.
deflector blades - Adjustable horizontal air-deflector blades are
standard. Vertical blades are also standard on models HC/HS-258, HC/HS-290 & HC/HS-340 & are
optional on other models. Both horizontal & vertical blades are illustrated.
safety fan guard - Standard equipment. Bolted to rear casing, steel rod fan guard completely
surrounds the fan offering constant protection.
Casings - Baked-on gray-green high solids paint is applied over rust-& corrosion-resistance-treated
steel for long life.
Model GHS620-9
The A-Maizing-Heat furnace can utilize any kind of biomass including
corn and wood pellets. The low cost of shelled corn, togethert with
the efficient burning process of this furnace and boiler, produces an
economical, ecologically safe heating system. This furnace burns
clean with no creosote and is the first U.L. listed shell corn fired central furnace. The A-Maizing-Heat furnace delivers safe and comfortable heat. Better alternative than wood burning. Holds
up to a 10 day supply of fuel that is automatically fed.
Quality construction for long-lasting performance
Specifications:
40 lb Bag
Catalog
DescriptionNumber Price
GHS620-9 Heater
34-2590-
$—
Hardwood Pellets
34-2595-
Call for Pricing
heaters
SHIPPED FOB:
Missouri
®
• Developed for American Greenhouses by TrueLeaf technologies and Biemmedue of Italy. The BM2 Silver Bullet
offers a direct-fired air heater designed specifically for greenhouses with features that make it
the best choice for your next heater investment.
• CSA approved as a greenhouse heater, the BM2
Silver Bullet has 99% efficiency in the burner,
combined with a built-in blower. The pressurized combustion chamber ensures that the fuel is
always burned efficiently, completely and cleanly;
the built-in catalytic burner removes what little escapes
the flame.
• All electronic controls are protected in a sealed enclosure, so the unit can handle the normal dust, dirt and
wet found in most greenhouse environments. A stainless
steel chassis ensures a long life span with no corrosion
issues. Small, self-contained units are designed to hang
in the upper reaches of a greenhouse and to be hosed
down for cleaning.
• Available in BTUH class of 400 and 250, the complete unit
weighs only 100 to 125 lbs, depending on its configuration. For large efficiencies in a small package, the BM2
Silver Bullet delivers outstanding value.
Model
400
250
438
BTUH
Input
402, 760
259, 530
• Furnace Dimensions: 53” H x 27” W x 46” D
• Bin Dimensions: 48” H x 36” x 52” D
• Furnace Weight: 440 lbs
• Bin Weight: 50 lbs
• Bin Capacity: 14 bushel
• Flue Pipe diameter: 6” round
• Supply and Return air Plenum Openings:
14” x 14”
• Heat Exchanger: 14 gauge steel
• Fire Pot: 5/8” cast iron
• Air Filter: 20” x 20” x 1”
• Combustion Blower: 75 CFM
• Hot Air Blower: 1/2” hp - 3 speed
• Adjustable Input BTU’s: 80,000-150,000
• Thermostat Controlled
• UL Listed
• Manufactured for right or left hand feed into
furnace
• Power: 120V
• Fuse Size Required: 15 amp
BM2 Silver Bullet
Clean Burning Direct Fire Heater
Control Panel
11
9 4 14
10 8
Features:
• CSA approved as a greenhouse heater
• Super clean burn catalytic burner
• Pressurized combustion
• Electronic controls in
sealed enclosure
• Heavy stainless steel construction
• High fan capacity
• Can be washed down
• Up to 99% efficient
13
1
15
5
12
1. Combustion Chamber
2.Burner
3. Diffusion Ring
4. Safety Thermostat Reset
5. Cooling Fan
6. Ionization Electrode
7. Ignition Electrode
8. Control Flame Electronic
Rest with Lamp
Heat
Air Movement
Amp
Output
(CFM)
Voltage Draw Weight
Dimensions
398, 732
4,120
120V/60Hz 8.7
123 lbs 48.8” x 29.5” x 28.27”
256, 934
2,766
120V/60Hz 5.0
100 lbs 45.1” x 26.0” x 24.57”
800-325-3055
6 32 7
9. Heating Switch
10.Room Thermostat Plug
11.Control Lamp
12.Cable Fastener for Power
Cord
13.Cable Fastener for Remote
Control Kit
14.Ventilation Mode Switch
Catalog
Number
42-0724-
42-0726-
Price
$—
—
SHIPPED FOB:
California
www.hummert.com
High Efficiency Boilers
and Water Heaters
®
TrueLeaf has been innovating greenhouse heating
systems for over 20 years. A full spectrum of solutions
are available, each one precision engineered for your
specific needs. TrueLeaf takes the systems approach
to greenhouse projects. They make sure all the diverse
systems in a greenhouse work effortlessly together in
an integrated way.
RayPak X-Therm and X-Frye
Time-honored technologies unite with cutting edge advancements in RayPak’s X-Therm
and X-Frye. These provide both the installer
and building owner such installation flexibility,
ease-of-commissioning, reliability and long-term
performance. Both of these are condensing,
high-efficiency, small footprints, on-board diagnostic centers and are indoor/outdoor certified. Now is the perfect time to take a closer look at RayPak.
BioTherm Tubing
Roll N Grow
for Floors
Roll N Grow
for Benches
Roll out the heating mat, hook up
the fittings and you are ready to
go. BioTherm tubing is woven in 2”
center spacing, which is optimal for
propagation and most general greenhouse bench heating applications. Most growers install this material on the cross members of
commercial greenhouse rolling benches before placing expanded
metal on top. You can also roll it out on existing growing surfaces
of wood or other materials. Set plants directly on the mat, hook up
the hot water lines (designed on a custom basis), and enjoy supreme
growth and energy efficiency. The BioTherm is woven in on
3” centers, which provides
optimum even greenhouse
heating for gently warming crops. This product is
designed to withstand foot and
cart traffic. It’s a great, cost
effective way to heat any floor area, without having to bring in costly
concrete. When installed properly this system can be rolled up when
not in use.
BioTherm Piping
SunFin
Warm Floor Heating
Systems
StarFin
BioTherm StarFins tapered
six-fin design has three times
the surface area of two-fin
designs or 51 mm thin-wall
steel tubing. This increased
surface area produces high
heat output, allowing lower
water temperatures to be used
while producing soft, gentle
greenhouse heat. High heat output cuts installation time and labor
because fewer pipes are required to meet the heat load.
DuoFin
DuoFin provides incredibly even heating
across the width of your greenhouse growing areas. Its unique tapered fin design
delivers a combination of convective and
radiant heating quietly and efficiently. Having only two fins means that more
loops are needed to meet your heat load,
but it also means you will never have to
clean debris from the fins. The large inside
diameter means less pumping energy is
required to provide greater evenness.
800-325-3055
Vertical DuoFin
The vertical DuoFin is commonly designed to rise as
crops grow and using lower
water temperature, heat is
provided where the plant
needs it most instead of heating the greenhouse air. The
vertical DuoFin is great for
tall crops such as tomatoes
and cucumbers. It provides a
heated pipe in the crop where
flowering and fruiting occur ensuring optimal growth.
Hummert
International
Ships Worldwide
For Assistance on International Orders,
Email [email protected] or
Call 314-506-4500
www.hummert.com
439
TrueLeaf heating systems
If you are going to pour concrete
in any area where plants or people
will be, it makes sense to install
floor heating. Not only is it one of
the most effective methods of heating with the boost to plant growth,
it creates a very pleasant working
environment. High-Density Polyethylene (HDX) tubing is strong, extremely tough, and very durable. It is made of an ultra-high molecular weight resin and comes in a
distinctive red color so you know you are getting true HDX tubing.
BioTherm SunFin is a high-output, radiant heat finned pipe made specifically for
various greenhouse heating applications. Manufactured completely from aluminum,
BioTherm SunFin pipes do not rust in growing environments. They are lightweight, so they can be stacked as
perimeter heating without overloading the structure and hang easily
for top heat and snow melt applications. BioTherm SunFin is available in 12 foot lengths, with custom lengths available upon request.
Greenhouse Controllers
Still using thermostats? Step up to an advanced monitoring and control system
that can be accessed from any remote device, anywhere in the world.
iGrow 100 Series
The iGrow 100 Series is an advanced greenhouse controller system which allows you to
monitor and change a vast array of settings pertaining to your greenhouse cooling and heating equipment in order to maximize efficiency. The 100 Series comes with either four or eight
outputs, and is a perfect entry-level system to transition from relying on old and outdated
thermostats to state-of-the-art technology for your greenhouse.
Gain complete peace of mind knowing that your greenhouse is well looked after. This system
can grant you remote access to not only monitor, but make immediates changes to settings, no
matter where you are in the world, via any internet-enabled device.*
iGrow 100 series controllers require a relay/contractor cabinet to interface the iGrow controller
to line voltage equipment. See page 441 for a complete line of Link4 Series 100 UL integrated
panels, custom UL Pre-Wired Relay/Contactor Cabinets and UL Standard Non-Integrated panels.
*S Comm Module and internet connection required.
iGrow 400 and 800 controllers are complete with temperature probe sensor and 50’
unshielded cable. Cable lengths over 50’ use shielded cable, see page 442.
Link 4 greenhouse controllers
iGrow 1000 Series
Combining sophisticated data collection and monitoring, with easy setup and
use, the iGrow 1000 series controls both environmental conditions and irrigation.
to install, use and maintain. The interface of
The iGrow 1000 Series is an advanced
controller system for your greenhouse
the controllers is very intuitive and you can
that is ideal whenever you are looking to
use it to make immediate changes to the
significantly expand or improve your operainput and output settings at any time you
wish. When it is time to add another controltion. It includes the iGrow 1200, 1400 and
1600 model, depending on your needs and
ler to your expanding operation, all you
the size of your greenhouse, but all of them
need to do is simply connect the new concome equipped with a multitude of settings
troller, configure it and restart the system.
and features that grant you complete control
The iGrow 1000 Series will do the rest.
over the equipment that you are using in
The iGrow 1000 Series is not only an enviyour greenhouse, allowing you to customronmental controller, but also works as an
ize energy usage according to your exact
irrigation controller. This will also save you
specifications so that you obtain maximum
money by eliminating all the costs associatefficiency.
ed with adding another irrigation controller
- purchasing, installation and maintenance.
Despite being a very sophisticated piece of
equipment, which can provide you with tons
iGrow 1200, 1400 and 1600 include Digital
of accurate data regarding your greenhouse
Temperature and Humidity Sensor with
equipment, the iGrow 1000 Series is easy
100’ shielded cable.
iGrow Series
Model
400 800 1200 14001600
Basic Features (environmental control)
Programmable 4 8 12 1212
Outputs
2+6
2+6
6+6
6+6
6+6
Heating + Cooling Stages
Hum + Dehum
1+1
1+1
2+1
2+1
2+1
Stage
Set Point
3 3444
Periods
Special Features (unique capabilities)
Vent Motor 




Control
Curtain Motor 




Control
Multi-Zone





Control
Co2 Control





Boiler Control





Fertigation:





pH & EC
Catalog Number 29-1157-1 29-1158-129-1159-129-1160-129-1150-1
Price
$ —
$ —
$ —
$ —
$—
Legend:  not available  optional  included
SHIPPED FOB: California
440
800-325-3055
Greenhouse Sensors
Catalog
Description
NumberPrice
iGrow 100 Series options & accessories
Vent/Curtain Upgrade
S Comm Module Remote Access 100 Series Weather Station w/50’ cable
100 Series Temp & RH Sensor w/ 50’ cable
100 Series Temp Probe Sensor w/ 50’ cable
29-1172-1
29-1174-1
29-1163-1
29-1176-1
29-1178-1
$—
—
—
—
—
iGrow 1000 Series options & accessories
1000 Series Weather Station w/ Anemometer* 29-0056-
$—
1000 Series Digital Temp & Humidity Sensor
29-1161-
—
Inside w/ 100’ cable
1000 Series Digital Temp & Humidity Sensor
29-0058-
—
Outside w/ 100’ cable
1000 Series Temperature Probe w/ Radiation Shield*29-0062-
—
Bottom Heat/Soil Temp probe (non-threaded) (6’) 29-0064-
—
Solar Light Senor w/ 50’ cable
29-0068-
—
PAR Light Sensor w/ 50’ cable
29-0070-
—
Anemometer (wind & speed direction) 40’ cable 29-0072-
—
Optical Rain Sensor w/ 50’ cable
29-0074-
—
CO2 Monitor (NEMA4 sealed)*
29-0076-
—
Soil Moisture Sensor w/ 6’ cable
29-0098-—
Barometric Pressure Sensor*
29-0080-
—
pH Measurement Kit w/ 100’ cable
29-0082-
—
EC Measurement Kit w/ 100’ cable 29-0086-
—
*Cable is not included. See page 442 for
2, 4 and 12 pair shielded cable.
www.hummert.com
Greenhouse Controllers
Integrated Panels
Our integrated panels and iGrow controllers are designed to work together.
The result is an easy to use, cost-effective, quality system designed and built for
efficient operation.
Typically, a lot of customers fail to realize that they need a UL panel
for each greenhouse controller, resulting in added costs and installation delays. Link4 designs and builds all of our panels to work efficiently with our greenhouse controllers. It’s
a one-stop complete system that also keeps Catalog
Description
NumberPrice
your costs down.
Link4 Integrated panels combine a UL
high-voltage panel with an iGrow 100 Series
controller. These panels come pre-wired and
pre-tested in order to ensure top quality and
to prevent wiring errors from delaying your
work in the future and costing you more
money in electrician bills. With an Integrate
Panel, you can wire high-voltage directly
into the box for immediate use!
Integrated Panels are not intended for two
speed fans.
iGrow 400 Integrated Panel
M1 4x30A PR*
29-0114-1
M2 2x12A+2x18A**29-0116-1
$—
—
iGrow 800 Integrated Panel
M1 4x30A PR*
29-0118-1
M2 2x12A+2x18A**29-0120-1
M3 2x10A+3x12A 29-0122-1
M4 2x10A+3x12A+ 29-0124-1
3x18A**
29-0126-1
M5 8x10A
$—
—
—
—
—
* Power relays
** Load contactor
10A = control relay
Contactor Cabinet
Custom Pre-Wired Relay/Contactor Cabinet
Custom Pre-Wired Cabinet 29-0138-1 Call for pricing
iPonic 614 - Hydroponic Controller
Gain complete control over your
grow room equipment wherever
you are.
The iPonic 614 is the ultimate grow
room controller. With this fully programmable and easy-to-use controller, you
will be able to monitor and coordinate
all of your grow room equipment - CO2,
lighting panel, dehumidifier, irrigation
pump, fans, etc - from one central hub.
Access your grow room from anywhere in the world thanks to the
iPonic Cloud Service and monitor your grow room from any computer, smart phone or tablet. Log on to our secured cloud server to
monitor your progress and make on the fly changes.*
*S Comm Module and internet connection required.
Catalog
Description
NumberPrice
iPonic 614 Hydroponic Controller* 29-0140-1
$—
D.I.S.M. Digital Integrated Sensor Module 29-0142-1—
D.I.S.M. 50’ Extension Cable
29-0144-1—
iPonic Communications Module
29-0146-1
—
*iPonic Communication Module enables access to the iPonic Cloud
**iPonic 614 Hydroponic Controller Includes bundled D.I.S.M. Digital Sensor Module
SHIPPED FOB:
Catalog
Description
NumberPrice
Link4 Standard Non-Integrated Contactor Panel
M1 4x30A Power Relay
29-0128-1
$—
M2 2x12A Relays + 2x18A Contactors 29-0130-1—
M3 2x10A Relays & 3x12A Contactors29-0132-1
—
M4 2x10A Relays & 3x12A + 3x18A29-0134-1
—
Contactors
M5 8x10A Relays
29-0136-1—
Software
Smart, simple monitoring of
up to 128 controllers from a
single PC
Catalog
Description
NumberPrice
iControl - 100 iGrow 100 Series PC Software
iControl 100 Greenhouse Software*
29-1162-1
$—
iControl - 1000 iGrow 1000 Series PC Software
iControl 1000 Greenhouse Software** 29-0148-1
$—
*single controller license ** single site license (unlimited controllers)
Find
Peace of Mind
With Link4 Controls
Monitor or adjust your greenhouse
or grow room settings from any
Internet-enabled mobile device
California
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
441
Link 4 greenhouse controllers
In order to interface low voltage
controls to line voltage equipment an optional pre-wired relay/
contactor cabinet is required. Link4
custom cabinets are UL listed and
are designed and manufactured for
your project. Cabinets include factory
installed transformer, contactors and
relays. Included are custom drawings
showing all sensor and equipment
connections.
Greenhouse Controllers
Weather Station
Accurate weather readings = Better crop yields; Link4 Weather Station delivers
consistent, reliable performance.
Link4’s Weather Station is a key component to your complete controls solution. For the most
accurate reading of weather conditions, Link4’s full-featured Weather Station is specifically
designed to fit your iGrow controllers. With the ability to detect the most minute changes in
weather conditions to full-blown storms, Link4’s Weather Station is the perfect combination
of sensitivity and durability. Encased in specially designed enclosures and radiation shields,
the Link4 Weather Station is protected against solar radiation and reflected heat, ensuring
the most accurate weather readings for your iGrow controllers. All of this means better crop
yeilds, better crop protections, and lower energy costs.
The Weather Station will measure temperature, relative humidity, solar irradiance, wind speed
and direction, as well as detect precipitation and rain. All sensors have an operational range
of -40ºF to 185ºF (-40ºC to 85ºC). Compatible with Link4’s iGrow 100 Series and the iGrow
1000 Series Environmental Controllers, all measurements from the Weather Station can be
measured, calibrated (if needed), datalogged, and controlled using one of Link4’s innovative
climate controllers
iDrive Motor Controllers
Accessories
Powerful vent,
curtain and
motor control
that’s easy
to install and
easier to use
From communications and expansion modules to standard
contactor panels, Link4 has all the accessories to maximize
your control and networking capabilities.
Model
Number
Description
Catalog
NumberPrice
Link 4 greenhouse controllers
Accessories - expand the functionality
of your iGrow controllers
Model
Number
Description
Catalog
NumberPrice
iDrive 150AC - Reversible Motor Controller for AC motors
970-0010-00m
970-0010-00s
120 VAC Master w/ Limit Switch Interface
120 VAC Slave w/
Limit Switch Interface
29-0150-
$—
29-0152-
—
iDrive 150DC - Reversible Motor Controller for DC motors
972-2401-05
120 VAC UL approved
24VDC/5A Motor Drive
29-0154-
$—
iDrive 300 - Reversible Motor Controller with limit switch
interface + thermal overload
970-0013-aam Single Phase - 3 Wire
Master
970-0013-aas Single Phase - 3 Wire
Slave
970-0013-aam Three Phase - 3 Wire
Master
970-0013-aas Three Phase - 3 Wire
Slave
970-0015-aam 5 Wire Master
970-0015-aas 5 Wire Slave
29-0156-
$—
29-0158-
—
29-0160-
—
29-0162-
—
29-0164-
29-0166-
—
—
When ordering the iDrive 300, adjust the part # to
match your desired specifications: 970-XXYZ-AAM
xx = voltage (00 - selectable 120/208/230VAC, 48 - 480VAC)
y = phase (1 - single, 3 - three phase)
SHIPPED FOB:
442
850-1001-00
990-0232-00
990-0541-00
360-0010-01
360-0010-00
551-0012-00
551-0000-01
Serial to Wireless Communication Radio
Wireless WiFi PC
serial interface kit
Programming Cable (firmware upgrade cable)
100 Series USB to
Serial Converter-RS485
1000 Series USB to
Serial Converter-RS232
Replacement iGrow 12VDC power supply
DIN rail mounted iGrow
12VDC power supply
29-0094-
$—
29-0096-
—
29-0098-
—
29-0100-
—
29-0102-
—
29-0104-
—
29-0106-
—
360-0002-01
360-0004-01
360-0012-01
2 conductor shielded cable*
4 conductor shielded cable**
12 conductor shielded cable***
29-0108-
$—
29-0110-
—
29-0112-
—
Cables - pre-approved cabling for Link4
sensors and networking
* price per foot (for light sensors, temperature probes and networking)
** price per foot (for digital temperature and humidity sensor)
***price per foot (for weather station)
aa = thermal overload:
04 = .25 - 0.4A 16 = 1.0 - 1.6A 60 = 4.0 - 6.0A 91 = 7.0 - 9.0A
06 = 0.4 - .63A 25 = 1.6 - 2.5A 80 = 5.0 - 8.0A 93 = 9.0 - 10.0A
10 = .63 - 1.0A 40 = 2.5 - 4.0A 90 = 6.0 - 9.0A 96 = 12.0 - 16.0A
Example 1: 970-0033-60s = 208V, 3 Phase, 3 wire, 4.0 - 6.0A Overload, Slave
Example 2: 970-0013-80m = 120V, 1 Phase, 3 wire, 5.0-8.0A Overload, Master
All Link4 Motor Controllers are UL and cUL approved
California
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
MICRO
GROW
GREENHOUSE SYSTEMS, INC.
Grow Master
Growmaster Procom
Growcom
Years of research and development have resulted in the Growmaster
Procom being the system of choice for hundreds of commercial and
research greenhouses and growing operations throughout the world.
From a single zone operation, to complex multiple zone application,
the Procom delivers time and time again. The Procom features “state
of the art” control algorithms based on internal greenhouse conditions
as well as outdoor weather conditions. Also included are four separate
daily operation modes including DIF. Manual override switches are
located on the front panel for ease of use. A large informative display
constantly updates as to all greenhouse conditions and equipment
operations. Enclosed in a NEMA 12, lockable non-metallic enclosure
with a clear cover, the Procom is easy to use and easy to install on
new and existing projects.
• Low voltage 24 VAC operations.
• Order sensors separately.
• Multiple zone capability.
• Order Sensors Separately.
• The Growcom features four separate daily operations modes including DIF.
• Low voltage 24 VAC operation.
• Single zone operation. Heating, cooling, two sets of vents, and an
air circulation stage. DIF operations standard.
• Order sensors separately.
29-3017-1$ —
Controlled Equipment:
Procom & growcom SENSORS
Catalog
Number
Description
Price
Temperature & Humidity Sensor Temperature Sensor only Soil Temperature Sensor Soil Moisture Sensor Probe Hot Water Temperature Sensor Humidity Sensor (standard electronic CMOS) Humidity Sensor (high level, current loop, fast recovery)
29-3030-1
29-3032-1
29-3033-1
29-3126-1
29-3034-1
29-3039-1
29-3049-1
$—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Aspirated Fan Sensor Upgrade Solar Radiation (K-Lux or Watts/meter square) Solar Quantum, PAR (photosynthetic radiation) Solar Radiation, Pyranometer (uE) CO2 Infrared Sensor Weather Stat Sensor (wind speed & rain) Weathermaster Sensor (wind speed, direction, rain, solar radiation,outdoor temperature)
29-3031-1
29-3035-1
29-3036-1
29-3037-1
29-3038-1
29-3127-1
29-3128-1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(Sensors are complete with 100’ of cable and housing)
Custom Pre-Wired Contactor/Relay Cabinet
In order to interface the line voltage equipment to the low voltage controls,
an optional pre-wired contactor/relay cabinet is required. Micro-Grow’s
custom pre-wired contactor/relay cabinet consists of a lockable, hinged and
weatherproof NEMA12 non-metallic enclosure that is designed and manufactured for your particular project. Enclosures include factory installed load
contactors, control relays and transformer. Cabinet is complete with custom
drawings showing all sensor and equipment connections. Built to UL specifications, listed and labeled to meet requirements in the USA and Canada.
29-3040-1 Call for Pricing
800-325-3055
• Exhaust Fans
• Gas Fired Heaters
• Pad Pumps
• Steam and Hot Water Heating
• Evaporative Coolers
• Hot Water Mixing Valves
• Positive Pressure Cooling
• Boiler Control
• Motorized Roof & Side Vents • Floor Heating Systems
• Proportional Roll Up Curtains • Soil Heating Systems
• Shade & Energy Curtains
• Radiant Heating Systems
• Fog Systems
• Heated Irrigation Water
• HID Crop Lighting
• Alarm System Dialers
• Horizontal Air Flow Fans
• CO2 Burners and Injectors
The Growmaster series of greenhouse computer control systems offer
the modern grower a choice in exact environmental control... by itself,
or with the Growlink Program connected to the grower’s own PC. As
a stand alone system, all features including programming and system
reports are available to the grower. With the Growlink Computer
Software Program, remote operation, graphs, and enhanced reports
are possible. Manual override switches, a large LCD display, output
status LED’s, and convenient grower programming switches are front
panel located.
SHIPPED FOB: California
Contact Hummert’s Greenhouse Sales
and Design Department for further
information and pricing for the complete line of Microgrow Controls
•Growlink computer
software
•Weathermaster
•Weatherstat
•Ventmate Plus
SHIPPED FOB:
•Growmate Plus
•Growmate Combo
•Growstat
•Shadestat
•Ventstat
California
www.hummert.com
443
Micro Grow controllers
29-3015-1$ —
Custom Pre-wired Enclosure
Enjoy the same precision control as the Procom. The Growmaster
Growcom is a single zone environment control system. The Growcom
can also be used with Growlink, a Windows based software.
®
The Leader in
Control Technology
Basic system
pricing starts
around
$10,000
(for control of
up to 4 simple
climate zones)
Argus Sensors
Argus controls
Argus provides a full range of
sensors, including:
• Temperature
• Humidity
• CO2
• pH
• EC
• Flow measurement
• Soil moisture
• Vent position
• Nutrient control
• Rain detection
• Equipment
• Wind speed and
operation
direction
• Level sensing
• Argus can interface
• Light measurement
to almost any industrial sensor
• Pressure
Argus can control
irrigation and
misting systems
Equipment Control
An Argus System can provide almost any type of
custom equipment control and monitoring, including:
• Boilers (control and protection)
• Heating systems (hydronic, steam, forced air,
infrared, electric, gas, geothermal)
• Bench and floor heat
• Heat exchangers
• Roof and sidewall vents
• Ventilation fans
• Evaporative coolers
• Horizontal air flow (HAF)fans
• Shade and thermal curtains
• CO2 monitoring and dosing
• Heat storage and recovery systems
• Lighting systems
• Irrigation systems
• Nutrient injection and fertilization systems
• Cogeneration systems
• Solenoid valves, proportional valves, mixing valves
• Alarms
• Please contact our Greenhouse Department for pricing and questions - 800-325-3055
444
800-325-3055
An Argus System can replace all of your aging
stand-alone thermostats, vent controllers, irrigation stations, time clocks, and step controllers
with a single, automated, integrated control
system. Imagine having complete command of
your environmental, irrigation, and nutrient control equipment from a central or remote location.
Irrigation: Argus can manage all types of irrigation systems including mist and fog, irrigation
valves, booms, flood floors, ebb and flood
benches, and outdoor field or container beds.
Nutrient Control: Argus provides control and monitoring for all types of nutrient dosing equipment including dilute tank
systems, inline injection, and single element dosing systems. Argus Controls
coordinate different water sensors, tanks, and
pumping systems. Get more from your system
using Argus capacity management.
Service and Support
All Argus Systems include free
lifetime telephone support through Argus
Technical Support Staff (toll
free in Canada and the United States).
Argus Systems are engineered for
maximum reliability and low
maintenance, and are designed to be
installed and maintained by the owner.
Modular components are reliable and
relatively simple to replace. Argus
provides detailed drawings and
installation instructions.
System Features
• Flexible
• Modular - purchase only the
hardware components you require
• Unlimited expansion possibilities
• Reliable (not PC-dependent)
• Comprehensive - you get a
complete set of programs to
meet your current and future
requirements
• Factory configured to your
specifications
• Argus Systems can be owner
installed, or let Hummert
International’s Greenhouse
Construction & Service Group install
your next Argus Control System
Argus Panel Options
• Argus can provide
custom-built UL
certified relay and
motor control cabinets
in a variety of
configurations to
suit your requirements
Featured in ”True Leaf” Product Lines.
www.hummert.com
WADSWORTH
C ontrol Syste m s
Maintaining the Climate for Growth
EnviroSTEP™
PLEASE DO NOT CHANGE THESE FONTS TO OUTLINES.
IF YOU DON’T WANT TO LOAD THE FONTS, USE THE NON-FONT VERSION
“Wadsworth_logo_noFonts.eps”
Each year hundreds of growers install EnviroSTEP controls in their
greenhouses. It’s the flexible, rugged choice to integrate the climate
control equipment for one zone. There’s no better combination of
power and value than the EnviroSTEP. Garden centers, production
growers, laboratories and schools all benefit from this control. And it
bears the UL mark, your assurance of regulatory approval.
Features:
• Single zone control
• New and improved back lit LED screen
• 3 set point periods — day, night and DIF
• 12 relay outputs with manual override switches
• 2 analog outputs (0 to 10VDC) to control variable-speed fans and
modulating valves
• 7 analog input channels for connecting light, CO2, RH and
temperature sensors
• 4 digital detector channels sense precipitation, wind speed & direction
• Records the status of all inputs and outputs in 15-minute increments
• Alarm outputs: temperature, RH and power failure
• Replaceable 10 amp DPDT relays, can operate a wide variety of
equipment — these relays reduce the cost of your contactor panel
• Durable corrosion-resistant cabinet with locking door protects cabinet;
measures 16” x 16” x 5”
• Largest display in the industry; has menu-driven choices and
graphic functions
• Keypad for easy operation
• Ramping allows for gentle transition between set point periods and
saves fuel
Includes:
• Solar-guarded aspirated temperature & humidity sensor & 100’ of cable
Accessories:
• STEPsaver software, alarm manager, wireless alarm manager, weather
station, lightning protector
EnviroSTEP
29-4072-1 $—
STEP Up Control™
STEP Up to improved control and increased profits. Very easy to use
and provides even better control over the environment. STEP Up is an
approved energy saving device.
Easy to Use
Features:
Improves Crop Quality
Custom
™Contactor
Wadsworth’s STEP Controls that come
with 10 amp DPDT relays can operate a
wide variety of equipment (i.e. exhaust
fans, pad pumps). However, larger motor
pads must first be connected to special
purpose relays called motor starters or
contactors. If you do not already own a
motor starter for the motor loads requiring
control, you will need to obtain them for your electrician, an
electrical supply house, or from Wadsworth Control Systems.
SHIPPED FOB:
29-4070-1
Reduces Fuel Costs
• Lowering the greenhouse temperature at night when 80% of the
heating occurs reduces energy consumption
• Ramping allows for gentle transition between set point periods and
saves fuel
• Using one central temperature sensor prevents heating and cooling
from running simultaneously
• Solar-guarded, aspirated digital temperature sensor provides a more
accurate temperature reading than unshielded sensors. For every 1° of
improved accuracy you reduce energy consumption by 3%
Includes:
• Solar-guarded aspirated temperature sensor and 100’ of cable • Cable to connect STEP Up to the contactor panel
Accessories:
• STEP Up compass software, weather guard alarm managerm
lightning protector
STEP Up Control 29-4012-1
$—
The Weather Guard™
Panel
Custom Contactor Panel • 3 set point temperature periods – day, night and DIF
• Reduced night temperature mimics nature
• Use DIF to reduce stretch growing
• Accurate temperature improves crop quality and consistency
• Timed overrides allow you to fumigate
Call for Pricing
The WeatherGuard™ is a standalone weather override system
that protects your greenhouse by
overriding normal operations to
close vents or retract shade systems
when high winds, cold weather, rain or snow might cause damage
to your crop or greenhouse. The
WeatherGuard™ can be integrated
with existing vent machines and
temperature controllers such as;
the STEP Up, STEP 50a or Versatile Vent. It will monitor outdoor
temperature, wind speed, wind direction and precipitation.
WeatherGuard
29-4038-1
$—
Colorado
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
445
Wadsworth controllers & accessories
• 6 stages: 2 stages of heating and 4 stages of cooling. Easily adjust the
temperature for each stage
• 3 set point temperature periods – day,
night and DIF; auto adjusts
based on sunrise and sunset
• Modulates vents and curtains
• 1 analog output (0 to 10VD or 4-20
milliamps) to control variable speed
fans and modulating valves
• Cycle timer
• Alarm output
• Password protection
• Easy to use knob and button interface
• Large menu-drive screen displays
current temperature, time, date, grow weeks, equipment status, etc.
• Records the temperature in 15-minute increments & stores it for 7 days
• Logs and graphs data
• High, low and average temperatures
• Timed override switches in addition to manual override toggle switches
• Stores settings in the event of a power failure
• Optional humidity sensor
• Durable corrosion-resistant cabinet: 9.5”x 6.25”x 3.75”
(241x159x95mm)
• Wadsworth programs your controller to operate your heating and
cooling equipment
Bartlett Greenhouse Controllers
Controller Features
• Two zones of control allows for 2 greenhouses or 2 zones within a
greenhouse to be controlled
• The 2 zones provide for 2 stages of
heat set points, 2 Horizontal Air Fans
(HAF) and 4 cooling set points
instrument company
• The controllers can be wired to allow
1 HAF to be automatically turned off
within each zone when the second
stage of cooling is activated
• There is a cycle timer that allows on/off control of irrigation,
misting or lighting. The misting cycle allows for settings in seconds
on and minutes off
• DIF, DAY and NITE settings provide programming the start times
and set-point temperatures of each stage
• A program can be set-up for vent stage control for
dehumidification based on time or for automatic control with the
optional humidification package
• There is also an alarm output that can trigger a bell or Sensaphone
when the greenhouse temperature becomes too high or low or
power loss is experienced
• The LED display features a large 4-digit display
• The durable plastic enclosure is sealed for moisture resistance
• Programming is easy with the provided instructions
• The controller has a built in 24-hour clock and memory with
battery backup. A 10 year battery is installed for clock memory.
Informational data is stored in non-volatile memory, assuring no
loss of programming occurs during a power outage
• Statistics are collected for the previous 7 days of operation and
viewable at the controller
• There is an adjustable override of temperature settings
• There are two temperature sensors provided that can be placed up
to 500’ from the controller
• The controller comes with UL listed 50VA transformer. The
controller can be powered by 120, 208 or 240 VAC. The output is
24V AC
• An optional humidity sensor can be installed to sense and record
humidity
Bartlett greenhouse controllers
bartlett
Easy Wire
• The Easy Wire provides easier installation and
efficient trouble shooting
and repair in case of
problems. It is a prewired relay box with
GHK 12x2 controller that
is connected by a
9’ cable
• The box measures 12”
x 18”x 6” and houses
the transformer, four 30Amp relays, and DIN rail
mount terminal blocks
for easy connection of
power and equipment.
• Easy Wire cabinet is not UL approved
PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE
While the prices listed are always current at the time of publication, they
do change over the time frame of our catalog. To alleviate any
problems this may cause, please call for current pricing or visit our website
SHIPPED FOB:
446
Iowa
800-325-3055
Models GHK12X2C and GHK12X2CH
• The models GHK12X2C and CH allow for the programming of
proportional control of vents or curtains
Models GHK12X2H and GHK12X2CH
• The models GHK12X2H and CH provide additional heating
control such as for bench heating. Up to 4 probes can be wired
to these 2 controllers
Curtain/Vent
Controller
HEATCOOL ProportionalAuxiliary Catalog
Models
StepsSteps Output
HEAT
Number
GHK12X2
2
4
29-5020-1
GHK12X2CH2 4
1 29-5021-1
GHK12X2H2 4
129-5022-1
GHK12X2CH2 4
1
1 29-5023-1
Price
$—
—
—
—
Computer
Inter-Face System
(CIS)
• The CIS system allows the grower to monitor and program
up to 50 controllers from a
personal computer.
• Allows the collection of
temperature, humidity and equipment use.
• Connects a computer using USB port
Optional Equipment
Model
Description
Easy Wire
Relay Box & Cable
GHKCIS1
CIS-Computer Interface RT10K4.4
Extra Thermistor
HUM1
Humidity Probe
KT8451-100 100’ cable for thermistor
KT8451-500 500’ cable for thermistor
KT8451-10001,000’ cable/thermistor
Catalog
NumberPrice
29-5025-1
$—
29-5026-1
—
29-5027-1
—
29-5028-1
—
29-5029-1
*Call
29-5031-1
*Call
29-5032-1
*Call
*Call for Pricing
www.hummert.com
Controls & Monitoring Systems
Wadsworth Thermostats
Wadsworth thermostats are commercial-grade controls built to survive in wet and harsh environments
Single-stage Thermostat Features:
Two-stage Thermostat Features:
• One stage for heating or cooling
• One SPDT staged switch for heating or
cooling
• Rugged, weather-resistant enclosure
• Corrosion-resistant materials for long life
• Low mass, high surface area of stainless
steel coiled sensor provides rapid response
to temperature change
• Temperature Range: 40˚ to 110˚ F
(4˚ to 43˚C)
• NEMA 4X enclosure complies with
NEC Article 547, UL Listed, CSA Certified
• Inductive Rating:
16A @ 120V, 13.2A @ 208V, 12A @ 240V
• Two stages for heating or cooling
• Two SPDT staged switches for heating or
cooling
• Rugged, weather resistant enclosure
• Corrosion-resistant materials for long life
• Low mass, high surface area of stainless steel
coiled sensor provides rapid response to
temperature change
• Temperature Range: 40˚ to 110˚ F (4˚ to 43˚C)
• NEMA 4X enclosure complies with
NEC Article 547, UL Listed, CSA Certified
• Inductive Rating:
16A @ 120V, 13.2A @ 208V, 12A @240V
MiniSTEP™ Control
• Improves crop quality by maintaining a more
accurate temperature
• Reduces fuel costs by centralizing all
temperature sensors, which prevents heating
and cooling from running simultaneously
• Increases productivity
• Preset heating and cooling stages
• Easy to install and operate
Features
Benefits
Switch from thermostats and save money. Research shows that using a simple, centralized control
reduces energy consumption. The MiniSTEP™ is an easy-to-use 4-stage control. It offers more energy
savings than thermostats because it uses a single temperature sensor. This prevents heating and cooling
equipment from operating at the same time.
• 1 stage of heat
• 3 stages of cooling
• LCD display of current temperature,
mode and output status
• Keypad provides easy operation
• Set point range: -40˚ to 220˚ F
• Durable corrosion-resistant cabinet:
16” x 14” x 6” (406 x 335 x 152 mm)
• 4-stage electronic control • A pre-wired contractor panel
• Blueprints, control schematics, one-line power, conduit and wiring layouts for installation
• Solar-shielded temperature sensor with 75’ of shielded cable
III
Greenhouse Monitoring System
The THERMALARM greenhouse monitoring system will set off an alarm whenever
the temperature reaches the high or low set point. Easy to install and use.
• The Thermalarm III uses hermetically sealed magnetic switches to trigger an alarm condition, eliminating concerns with corrosion and particle contamination of the contacts.
• This feature is of particular importance in applications where chemical fumes, high humidity and airborne dust and dirt particles are present.
• The adjustable set-hands extend through the bottom of the instrument housing so fingertips can be used to adjust the high and low limits - no tools needed.
• Airflow through the opening at the bottom of the instrument case allows the instrument to sense air temperature change more rapidly.
• The standard range of the Thermalarm III is from 20ºF to 110º F. Additional ranges are available on special order.
21⁄2” Bell
A new enclosed binding post type bell with
2 1/2” gong and a new modern compact
design, with temperature alarm.
CatalogPrice
Description Number
Each
Thermalarm lll
48-0080-1
$—
21⁄2” Bell
48-0090-1
—
18 GAUGE 2 CONDUCTOR COPPER WIRE-INSULATED
500’
19-0903-2
$—
800-325-3055
Electrical Requirements
Thermalarms are built to operate a low-voltage, low-current alarm system
(typically 6 to 24 volts DC @ 0.5 amp or less). A simple relay circuit should
be used in systems exceeding 0.5 amp of current.
Connect as many Thermalarms as you need!
FUSE
(1.5 AMP)
BELL
SIREN OR
OTHER
DEVICE
+
BATTERY
OR
POWER SUPPLY
RELAY
THERM ALARM
THERM ALARM
THERM ALARM
Multiple Thermalarms, wired in parallel with a relay
www.hummert.com
447
greenhouse monitoring systems
This complete package includes:
Remote Monitoring
Systems
Check your growing environment using a telephone
to connect to one of these security monitoring
devices by Sensaphone:
Model 400 and Model 800
allow remote notification of
these important events:
• Excessively high and low temperature or humidity changes
• Unusual sound disturbances like a smoke/fire/burglar alarm
• Intrusion detection
• Power outages
• Leaks or flooding
Occurrence of any of these events could yield catastrophic consequences if action is not taken immediately. Don’t waste valuable
time by being unaware when you could be notified by one of these
Sensaphone units. Here is how it works:
When a sensor is triggered, the Sensaphone will make a voice phone
call to one of the four pre-programmable numbers until someone
answers. You can set the Sensaphone to call your cell phone, property maintenance personnel, or a neighbor. Your Sensaphone unit will
Sensaphone monitoring system
• Identify itself and give the time
• State the problem
• Switch to its built-in microphone so you can hear any alarm.
Weather Proof
Remote Temp Sensor
Infra Red Motion
Detector
Magnetic Reed
Switch
The primary difference between the Model 400 and Model 800 are the
number of external inputs available. The Model 400 has four external
inputs and the Model 800 has eight external inputs. Both units offer
built-in monitoring for power failure, sound monitoring of audible
alarms and temperature sensing, so their respective external inputs
can be used for these additional accessories:
Sensaphone Accessories
Remote Temperature Sensor – Monitors temperatures at a location away from your sensaphone unit. Measures & tells you the exact
temperature and triggers an alarm when conditions exceed the set
high/low limits. Size: 21⁄2” x 3⁄4” x 1⁄2”
Passive InfraRed Motion Detector – monitor the movement
of warm bodies in a specific area. Will cause a dial out if motion is
detected. Monitors approx 50’ of unobstructed area. Multiple sensors
can be wired in series to a single input. Size: 21⁄2” x 61⁄4” x 2”
Magnetic Reed Switch – used to detect any unauthorized entry.
Use on door & windows. Size: 21⁄2” x 1⁄2” x 1⁄2”
Water Detection Sensor – Monitors the presence of water on a horizontal surface. Multiple sensors can be wired in series to a single input.
Size: 21⁄2” x 1” x x1⁄2”
Smoke Detector – Detects smoke independently from the primary
fire alarm system
Power Out Alert – Monitor power outages by plugging the unit into
any 110VAC outlet
Spot Water Level
Sensor
Smoke Detector
Features & Benefits:
Customizable Voice Alert:
New to the Model 400 and 800, you can create messages related
to specific alarms.
Programmable Relay Output:
Use your cell phone to remotely control thermostats or other devices while you are away.
Line Seizure:
This feature automatically “cuts off” any phone extension when an
alarm call is being made by your Sensaphone.
Nonvolatile Memory & Backup:
Should the electricity fail, batteries will automatically take over full
monitoring and phone reporting, including telling the user that
electricity is off. Uses 6 “D” batteries (not included).
Model
Catalog
Number Description
Approx. Size
Number
FGD-400
Sensaphone Model 400 (4 external inputs)
48-0074-1
FGD-800 Sensaphone Model 800 (8 external inputs)
48-0078-1
FGD-0101 Weatherproof Remote Temp Sensor
21⁄2” x 3⁄4” x 1⁄2”48-0092-1
48-0093-1
FGD-0007 Infrared Motion Detector
21⁄2” x 61⁄4” x 2”
FGD-0006 Magnetic Reed Switch (Intrusion Sensors)
21⁄2” x 1⁄2” x 1⁄2”48-0094-1
FGD-0013 Spot Water Detection Sensor (Water Level)
21⁄2” x 1” x x1⁄2”48-0095-1
FGD-0049 Smoke Detector
48-0089-1
*FGD-0054
Power Out Alert
48-0085-1
18-gauge, 2 cond Bell Wire, 500’ Roll
19-0903-2
*
448
800-325-3055
Power Out Alert
Price
$—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
www.hummert.com
Advanced Remote
Monitoring
Systems
• Most basic alarm dialer needs can be met with the Sensaphone
Model 1400 and Model 1800
• The Model 1400 has four universal inputs, and the Model 1800 has
eight universal inputs, monitors from any dry contact status device,
or any 4-20mA analog transducer
• When using analog devices, the Model 1400 can even scale the
input range so you
will be measuring
each condition in
real engineering
units
• The sealed Nema4X enclosure is also
well suited for outdoor environments
• Alarm notification
is performed with
phone calls using
custom voice messages
Sensors:
Boat Board
SHIPPED FOB:
Features:
• Create a call or text list with up to four phone numbers
• No need to install a second phone line
• Assign a “normal-state” for each input
• Determine a time delay for each input
• Record a custom message that indicates the location of
the alarm (ex: “north house cold”)
• Monitors eight dry contact inputs
• Alarm calls you if the system’s power is cut off
• Rechargeable backup battery if power outage occurs
• Plug-in wall transformer, splitter and phone extension cable
included
• FCC approved and registered
Benefits:
• Protects your crop by notifying you of dangerous conditions
and power outages
• Continues calling or sending texts of up to four numbers until
alarm is acknowledged
• Meshes with control complexity levels from a simple thermostat
(hot / cold) system up to a fully integrated STEP control
• Easy plug-and-play integration with EnviroSTEP,
VersiSTEP, STEP Up and Versatile Vent Controls
Wadsworth Alarm Manager
SHIPPED FOB:
Boat Board is a tough,
durable plastic that is
ideal for mounting
environmental and irrigation
controls to, in the hot and
high humid conditions
of a greenhouse. Boat Board
can be field cut and drilled.
Sheet size is ½” x 54” x 96”,
white in color.
Boat Board 24-8573-1 Keep your crop safe with our easy-to-use Alarm Manager and
Wireless Alarm Manager. They are both remarkably persistent devices. They continue to call (Alarm Manager) or send text messages
(Wireless Alarm Manager) until they receive a response from you.
29-4001-1
$—
Colorado
Let the experienced team AT
Hummert’s
Design and Build
the next greenhouse for your...
$ —
nSchool or University
nResidential Hobby Greenhouse
nResearch Facility
nGarden Center and Nursery
nCommercial Greenhouse nPropagation Greenhouse
Missouri
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
449
alarm systems & monitoring
The following Sensors can be used with the Models 1400 and 1800
and are in addition to the sensors found on the preceding page
under the Sensaphone 400 & 800
Humidistat Humidity Switch - The Humidistat Humidity Switch can
be used with all Sensaphone models to detect a high or low humidity level. The device will cause your Sensaphone to activate an alarm
when the humidity level reaches a set threshold.
Humidity Sensor - A space mount, low profile humidity transducer.
transmits actual humidity levels to Sensaphone for programmable
high and low alarm limits. Does not come with wire.
CO2 Sensor - Monitor Carbon Dioxide levels from 0 to 2,000ppm.
(Not compatible with the 400/800) The sensor will require a 24VDC
power supply to operate (See below, part FGD-0053).
Carbon Dioxide Sensor - The Sensaphone Carbon Dioxide sensor
will allow you to monitor levels of Carbon Dioxide from 0-2,000ppm
with any Sensaphone that will accept a 4-20mA input signal. The
sensor will need a 24VDC power supply to operate (See below, part
FGD-0053)
Model
Catalog
NumberDescriptionNumberPrice
1400Sensaphone 1400
48-0040-1
$—
1800Sensaphone 1800
48-0042-1
—
FGD-0027 Humidity Switch
48-0044-1
—
FGD-002Humidity Sensor
48-0046-1
—
FGD-0065 CO2 Sensor
48-0048-1
—
—
FGD-0068 Carbon Dioxide Sensor 48-0050-1
FGD-0053 24VDC power supply
48-0052-1
—
Alarm Manager™ &
Wireless Alarm Manager
P.L. Light
Systems
Ballasts
PL3000 1000 Watt Fixtures
• Improved collar design for easy installation and removal or retrofit
of all existing reflectors but also of any future developments in the
field of reflectors
• 2 piece heat dissipating extruded aluminum body with ventilation
openings to allow for maximum cooling
• Compact body reduces shading effect
• Available in 120, 208, 240, 277, 347, and 480 volts
• C.S.A. approved
• Available as convertible and remote
• All Metal Halide reflectors include the fitted tempered glass
protective covering
• Optional glass kits available upon request
PL2000 Fixtures
CatalogPC-1PC-2
Description
VoltageNumber
1-11
12 & up
P.L. light ballasts
Metal Halide (MH)
MH
MH
MH Remote
MH Remote
120, 208, 240,
277, 347
480
120, 208, 240,
277, 347
480
47-1722-
$ —
$—
47-1723- ——
47-1710-
—
—
47-1712-
—
—
High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
HPS
HPS
HPS Remote
120, 208, 240, 47-1720-
$ —
$—
277, 347
480
47-1714- ——
120, 208, 240, 47-1729-
—
—
277, 347, 480
Convertible
Convertible
120, 208, 240, 47-1727-
277
Convertible
120, 208, 240, 47-1716-
Remote277
$ —
$ —
—
—
• Improved collar design for easy installation and removal of all
reflectors
• Heat dissipating extruded aluminum body with ventilation
openings to allow for maximum cooling
• Compact body reduces shading effect
• Available in 120, 208, 240, 277, 347, and 480 volts
• C.S.A. and U.L. approved
• Glass Kits available upon request
Reflectors: See page 452
• 400W model comes standard with the Midi reflector
for maximum light intensity and uniformity. But deep is also
an option
• All Metal Halide reflectors include the fitted tempered glass
protective covering
CatalogPC-1PC-2
How to order PL Lights
1. Choose a ballast, wattage and voltage.
2. Reflectors and bulbs are included. Specify which
reflector from page 452
3. Each fixture requires ordering a 6’ power cord and
plug set in either 120v or 240v; see page 453
4. Add any necessary hanging hardware from page 453
We Appreciate
Your Business
450
Thank You!
800-325-3055
Description
VoltageNumber
1-11
12 & up
Metal Halide (MH)
MH 250 watt
MH 400 watt
120,
277,
120,
277,
208,
347,
208,
347,
240, 47-1448-
480
240, 47-1450-
480
$ —
$—
—
—
$ —
$—
—
—
—
—
High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
HPS 250 watt 120, 208, 240, 47-1476-
277, 347
HPS 400 watt 120, 208, 240, 47-1481-
277, 347
HPS 600 watt 120, 208, 240, 47-1509-
277, 347, 480
SHIPPED FOB: Canada
www.hummert.com
P.L. Light
Systems
Electronic
Ballasts
Electronic ballasts provide the highest level of efficiency. HSE fixtures were developed in anticipation of the need for higher
light levels within greenhouses while improving energy consumption.
HSESTD - 600 Watt Fixture
• Compact design to
minimize shadowing
• Unique membrane
within allows
ventilation of the driver
compartment while
preventing dust and
moisture from getting
in
• HSE fixtures run cooler
than standard ballasts
and typically have a
longer life span
• Equipped with an LED indicator (240v and 277v) that will notify
you if the fixture is not running optimally or has failed
• Available with the Delta, Zeta, Midi, or Deep reflector. Page 452.
• Self leveling ballasts are also available. Call for more information
• Utilizes a custom aluminum ballast compartment with built in heat
fins to reduce the electronic driver’s operating temperature by 6%
• Ballast compartment is hinged for easy maintenance and servicing
• Lamp holder assembly has a single part casting with slide lock
sockets to make lamping and re-lamping much quicker and easier
• Available with either the Alpha or Beta reflectors
• Fixture, bulb, and reflector included in price. Cord must be
purchased separately
CatalogPC-1PC-2
Description
VoltageNumber
1-11 12 & up
HPS 1000 watt 347, 400, 480 47-1585-
$ —
$—
3’ Whip Cord
—
47-1587-
—
—
HSE Daylight Fixtures - 315 Watt, 240 Volt
• This full spectrum light fixture can be used in normal greenhouse
applications for young plant production and for research areas
where mixing with HiD Systems would achieve high light levels
• This fixture really excels in applications where natural daylight is
lacking such as indoor farming, growth chambers, growing rooms,
office gardens or grading and packaging work
• Just as all electronic fixtures, these not only reduce power
consumption, but also ensure long lamp life
Available with two different lamp options:
Agro Lamp is designed to offer a light spectrum that maximizes
PAR light output. Similar to HPS output.
CatalogPC-1PC-2
DescriptionNumber
1-11
12 & up
Agro Lamp
47-1589-
$ —
$—
SHIPPED FOB:
Daylight Lamp produces a spectrum that has been adjusted to
provide a natural full spectrum daylight output.
CatalogPC-1PC-2
DescriptionNumber
1-11
12 & up
Daylight Lamp 47-1591-
$ —
$—
Canada
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
451
P.L. light electronic ballasts
CatalogPC-1PC-2
Description
VoltageNumber
1-11 12 & up
HPS 600 watt 240, 277, 347, 47-1580-
$ —
$ —
400
HPS 600 watt 480
47-1582-
—
—
3’ Cord Set
600
47-1584-
—
—
with Whip
HSENXT2 - 1000 Watt Fixtures
P.L. Light
Systems
Maxima Reflector 1000W
P.L. Light Systems are leaders in the design of
super efficient reflectors. Sound greenhouse
lighting depends strongly on the way light is
distributed to the crop. P.L. offers 9 reflectors;
each is designed to deliver the greatest output
and uniformity for specific applications.
Catalog No. 47-1562
• Designed for a more rectangular
illumination field
• Suitable for low mounting heights
• Suitable for higher
light levels
• 1000 watt only
All reflectors are made from one piece, pure aluminum and have
been highly polished and anodized for guaranteed uniformity.
Midi Reflector
Catalog No. 47-1550
• Specially designed for the
modern greenhouse to allow
you to work with one row per
bay in 26’ and 32’ bays
• For suspension heights over
6’ depending on the required
light level
• Remarkable performance
in 21’ bays as well
The small microscopic facets at the surface provide a diffused
light pattern and keep the deposit of dirt down to a minimum. The
enhanced mounting collar has been developed to provide customers
with enhanced durability and ease of maintenance.
Alpha Reflector 1000W
Electronic Ballasts
Catalog No. 47-1593
• Designed for a more rectangular
illumination field for uniformity
• Suitable for mounting heights
over 6’ with a max distance of 21’
between rows, depending on the
light level required
• 1000 watt Electronic ballasts only
Super Wide
Reflector*
Catalog No. 47-1558
• Designed for a more
rectangular illumination field
• Suitable for very low mounting
heights between 4’ and 5’
depending on the light level
required
• Provided with a standard
mirror diaphram to optimize
light distribution
P.L. light reflectors
Beta Reflector - 1000W
Electronic Ballasts
Catalog No. 47-1595
• Designed for a more rectangular
illumination field for increased light
levels
• Best performance at a mounting
height of 8’ or higher depending on
light level required
• Deep penetration of light into the
crop
• 1000 watt Electronic ballasts only
• Accepts glass shield
Wide Reflector*
Catalog No. 47-1556
• Designed for a more
rectangular illumination field
• Suitable for mounting heights
between 4’ and 5’ depending
on the light level required
• May be equipped with one
of two mirror diaphragms to
optimize light distribution
Deep Reflector
Catalog No. 47-1554
• Designed for a square illumination
field. Use in vegetable production.
• Deep penetration of light
into the crop
• Suitable for a height of 5’ depending
on the light level required
• Accepts glass shield
Zeta Reflector
Catalog No. 47-1597
• Designed to deliver the light better,
more efficiently and deeper into
the crop
• Suited for the more grid-like
patterns that are being used more
often in modern horticulture
• The Zeta is a further development
of the Beta reflector and is suitable
for 400W and 600W fixtures
Delta Reflector
Catalog No. 47-1551
• Made from special processed
aluminum alloy which gives
maximum reflection capacity
• This new material gives
maximum PAR efficiency
• Suitable for all common
lighting patterns used in the
greenhouse industry and
specifically for rectangular
patterns
SHIPPED FOB:
452
Canada
800-325-3055
Reflectors
CSA
TYPE
SJTW
LL47
979
105∞
C F
T2
16A
WG
X3C
Call us for
P.L. Light Sytems
Innovative Mounting
Solutions
UL/CSA Approved
L 14/3 T
CARO
*Upcharge for these models
www.hummert.com
P.L. Light
Systems
Mounting Hardware
Hardware &
Plug Sets
Cord and Plug Sets
For PL2000 & PL3000 HID Fixtures
CatalogPC-1PC-2
Description
VoltageNumber
1-11
12 & up
6’
120V
47-1520-
$ —
$—
6’
240V
47-1521-
—
—
Universal Track/Truss
Bracket
Universal Chain Set
Struts & other
mounting hardware
available. Call for
more info.
For HSESTD 600 - Electronic Fixtures
Approximate Heat Output of
Fixtures per Hour:
400 Watt Fixture = 1,120 BTU
600 Watt Fixture = 1,433 BTU
1,000 Watt Fixture = 2,388 BTU
Universal Track/Truss Mounting Bracket
(2/ballast)
Universal chain kit (chain & hooks) CatalogPC-1PC-2
Description
VoltageNumber
1-11
12 & up
3’ cordset with whip 600V
47-1584-
$ —
$—
For HSENXT2 - Electronic Fixtures
47-1538-1
$—
47-1548-1
—
CatalogPC-1PC-2
DescriptionNumber
1-11
12 & up
3’ whip cord
47-1587-
$ —
$—
SHIPPED FOB:
Canada
Need a lighting design? Call us today for a free layout!
Light Meters
on
rati
ope
eb
, on
ple
Sim
n
utto
• Measures light used for plant growth
in PAR which is a more valuable
measurement than foot-candles as it
measures only the light used by plants
for photosynthesis
• Measures photosynthetically active
radiation (PAR) from 400 to 700 nm
• Range of 0 to 2,000 µmol m-2 s-1
47-0707-1
• Measures the light “falling” on
plants, field crops or turf
• Displays light intensity levels
every 4 seconds for 24 hours
• Real-time intensity levels are
shown every 4 seconds in
µmol m-2 s-1 (or footcandles)
• Battery included; water resistant
47-0780-1 $ —
Hummert’s Helpful Hints
Your One Source For
Horticultural
Information
www.hummert.com • (800) 325-3055
800-325-3055
light hardware and light meters
3415FQF
Quantum & Footcandle
Light Meter
DLI 100
Light Meter
$—
Easy View Light Meter
• MIN/MAX readings
• Cosine and color corrected
measurements
• Low battery and overrange indication
• Auto power off to save battery life
• Utilizes precision silicon photodiode
sensor with 3’ coiled cable for easy
storage
• Data hold freezes reading on display
• Complete with built-in stand, remote
sensor with protective cover,
protective rubber holster, and 6
AAA batteries
• 4 ranges in footcandles from
20-20,000Fc, and also 4 ranges for
readings in lux from 20-20,000 lux with
an accuracy of ± 3%
47-0728-1
47-0728-2
1–5
6 & Up
www.hummert.com
$—
—
453
Professional Light Meters
Model LT300
Specifications:
•Large LCD display with digital and analog bar graph
•Wide range to 20,000 FC or 200,000 Lux with resolution
to 0.01 FC/Lux
•Relative mode indicates change in light levels
•Peak mode captures highest reading
•Power requirements — Operates on or 9 Volt battery
•Remote light sensor on 12” coiled cable-expandable to 24”
•Utilizes precision photo diode and color correction filter
•Cosine and color corrected measurements
•Min/Max and Data Hold
•Backlight for readings in low light levels
•Dimensions: 5.9” L x 2.95” W x 1.57” H; weight 7 oz
•Complete with 9V battery, light sensor with protective cover,
protective holster and pouch case
47-0722-1
$—
Model 407026
Heavy Duty Light Meter with PC Interface
Specifications:
light meters
•Simultaneously displays in foot candles or lux
•Senses 4 lighting types – Tungsten / Daylight, Metal Halide,
Fluorescent, or Sodium
•Light meter can be switched to percentage to show differential
of light from light source
•3 ranges of measurement for more accurate readings;
FC 200, 2,000, 5,000; Lux 2,000, 20,000 or 50,000
•Super large 1.4” LCD display
•Microprocessor assures maximum accuracy
•+/- 4% accuracy is enhanced by selecting lighting type
•Record/Recall, MIN, MAX, and AVG readings
•Data hold plus auto shut off
•Dimensions 7” x 2.9” x 1.3”; weight, 1.6 lbs
•Complete with 9V battery and protective holder
•Optional vinyl carrying case is available for added protection
CatalogPrice
Model
DescriptionNumberEach
407026
Light Meter
$—
47-0730-1
409997
Carrying Case
—
47-0731-1
PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE
While the prices listed are always current at the time of publication, they do change over the two-year time frame of our catalog.
To alleviate any problems this may cause, please call for current pricing or visit our website at
454
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
Replacement Lamps
High Pressure Sodium and Metal Halide
MHHPSHPSHPSHPS MHHPS MH
1000
1000 600 430 400
400 250
175
PL LIGHT 400 Watt MH needs a special bulb. Electronic Ballasts use special bulbs.
• High Pressure Sodium HPS Lamps are the most commonly
used lamps in the greenhouse. The spectral emission leans
toward the red. HPS lamps have a longer life expectancy than
Metal Halide lamps and maintain a high lumen level longer.
• MS-Metal Halide Lamps are used as the above MH lamps but
must be used in the horizontal position. These bulbs provide
more Lumens than conventional MH lamps but may only be used
in a system designed to take a MS bulb. This bulb has a tab on the
base to fit those designated systems.
Hummert replacement lamps
• Super Agro 430-This is used as a standard HPS lamp, but has a
30% increase in the blue spectrum for shorter internodes and will
provide an additional 6% more light.
• Metal Halide MH Lamps are used for thick lush vegetative
growth and are used in growth chambers or areas where no sunlight is available. The spectral emission leans toward the blue.
• Conversion HPS Lamps are meant to be used with a metal
halide ballast to provide the High Pressure Sodium spectrum.
PLEASE CALL AND LET US HELP YOU DESIGN
The NH360 works in a 400 MH ballast and the NH940 operates in
A CUSTOM LIGHTING LAYOUT FOR YOUR
the 1000 MH ballast. Sodium to Halide conversions are used in
GREENHOUSE OR PROpaGATION AREA
sodium ballasts.
Initial Rated CatalogPC-1PC-2
ModelDescription
Wattage
LumensHrsNumber
1-5
6 & up
HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM (HPS)
150 Watt
150
16,000
24,000
47-6000-
$ —
$—
BUSD150
BUSD250
250 Watt
250
28,500
24,000
47-6005-
—
—
BUSD400
LU400 Sodium
400
50,000
24,000
47-6010-
—
—
BUSD430SA
LU430 Sodium
430
54,000
16,000
47-6012-
—
—
BUSD600
LU600 Sodium
600
90,000
18,000
47-6015-
—
—
BUSD1TH
LU1000 Sodium
1,000
140,000
24,000
47-6020-
—
—
METAL HALIDE (MH)
175
13,000
10,000
47-6025-
$ —
$—
BUHL175UVHalide Universal
BUHL250UVHalide Universal
250
21,000
10,000
47-6030-
—
—
BUHL400UVHalide Universal
400
36,000
20,000
47-6035-
—
—
BUSUHL400BU
Base up High Output
400
40,000
20,000
47-6040-
—
—
BUSUHL400HZHorizontal HO
400
40,000
20,000
47-6045-
—
—
BUHL1THUVSMHalide Universal
1,000
110,000
12,000
47-6050-
—
—
HALIDE TO SODIUM CONVERSION
HX62443
Conversion
220
25,000
24,000
47-6055-
$ —
$—
HX62550
Conversion
360
45,000
24,000
47-6060-
—
—
HX61825
Conversion
940
130,000
24,000
47-6065-
—
—
SODIUM TO HALIDE CONVERSION
BUHL400CNB
Conversion
400
40,000
20,000
47-6070-
$ —
$—
SM80150
Conversion
1,000
110,000
12,000
47-6075-
—
—
SHIPPED FOB:
Texas
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
455
LED Lighting
GreenPower LED
Production Modules
GreenPower LED
Flowering Lamps
An energy saving alternative for extending day length
when cultivating strawberries and bedding plants or
producing cuttings from
Chrysanthemums and
Kalanchoes. This lamp has
been specially developed as
a replacement for the incandescent lamp to extend day
length to control flowering
or to break the winter dormancy.
Perfect for multilayer/vertical plant production and growth chambers,
the production modules radiate very little heat toward the plants.
The lights can then be placed closer to the crop which allows you
to utilize your space more efficiently without the need for additional
cooling. They also ensure uniform light distribution giving every
plant the same level and quality of light throughout the crop, while
reducing energy consumption up to 60% compared to conventional
fluorescent lighting. The modules are waterproof and easy to install.
Production modules are the perfect grow light for: seed germination,
young plant production, multi-layer production of leafy greens and
herbs, city farming, vertical farming, trials and research.
• Dimensions: 48.5” L x 1.58” W x 1.58” H
• Lifetime: 25,000 hours
• 60” long modules are also available. Call for more information
Deep Red/Blue
Deep Red/White
Deep Red/Blue/Far Red
47-7030-1
47-7020-1
47-7040-1
$—
—
—
The lamps have a standard
E27 fitting and are suitable
for direct replacement of
the lamps in your existing installation,
without the need for any modifications to the installation. Three different
lamps have been developed, each
offering a specific light recipe for different plants. For optimum control, a
specific spectrum of light is required
for each plant type.
100% Far Red (FR)
47-7080-1
Deep Red and White (DR/W)
47-7082-1
Deep Red/White/Far red (DR/W/FR) 47-7084-1
$—
—
—
LED lighting
GreenPower LED Research Modules
With the research modules, you can decide for yourself how much
red, blue and far-red light you want at any given moment and the
module’s dimming capability allows you to set the exact level of light
you require. With this flexibility, you can truly tune the light to meet
the specific needs of each crop or research project.
Red and blue are the most important colors for crop growth, while
far-red – barely visible to the human eye – influences the development of specific plant characteristics.
These modules are designed to operate with the Philips LED power
driver to ensure optimal performance. Lights can be strung together
using a connector piece that is sold separately.
They are designed for a shelf distance of 19.5”
Dimensions: 19” L x 1.3” W x 0.79” H
Dimming unit dimensions: 2” L x 0.79” W x 0.6” H
Catalog
DescriptionNumberPrice
GreenPower LED research module
Deep red
47-7100-1
$—
Far red
47-7104-1
—
Blue
47-7108-1—
Dimming Unit
LGM dimming unit
47-7112-1
$—
LED power driver
LED power driver 100W-24V, 47-7116-1
$—
100/240 V
Accessories
LGM Mounting bracket shelf
47-7120-1
$—
Connector Xtend
47-7132-1
—
Connector End Cap
47-7136-1
—
Extension cable AWG24
47-7140-1
—
Specification
Energy Consumption (Watts)
Lifetime (hours)
# of modules/Power Drive
Deep Red
10
25,000
10
Far Red
10
25,000
10
Blue
14
25,000
6
Interlighting
also available
from Philips;
please inquire
All images on this page are courtesy of Philips
456
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
Light Carts & Humidity Tents
Flora Cart
• Offers universal light fixture
compatibility with slide or chain,
40-watt fluorescent or HID light
fixtures
• Each shelf is welded for strength
and is adjustable in height
• They are a fabulous propagating
unit for many types of plants.
Also ideal for starting seeds and
for experimental work in plant
propagation
Dimensions:
• 74”H x 53”L x 20”D
• Constructed of 1-1⁄4” round
aluminum tubing
• Polished aluminum finish
• 3” heavy duty wheels
• Perfect for propagating plants or
starting seeds
• 3 – 20” W x 49” L x 1-1/2” D tan
fiberglass trays are included
• The trays are impervious to
chemicals,easily cleaned, and have
a drain hole with plug
Shelves/Wt Catalog
ModelUnit LbsNumberPrice
BA-3
3
62 65-6910-1
$—
To order
extra trays
NOTE:
Fixtures and lamps
sold separately.
Complete assembly
required.
SEE PAGE 459
Dimensions:
• 74”H x 53”L x 20”D
• 1” square aluminum tube framing
• 3 or 4 non-adjustable shelves
• Dark brown finish
• 3” heavy duty wheels
• Trays perfect for small or large
plants like orchids
• 3 or 4 – 20” W x 49” L x 1-1/2”D
tan fiberglass trays included
NOTE:
Fixtures and lamps
sold separately.
Complete assembly
required.
• Compatible with slide or chain 40-watt fluorescent or HID light
fixtures
• Tray has drain hole and plug. Ideal propagating/seed starting
unit for home gardeners
Shelves/Wt Catalog
ModelUnit LbsNumberPrice
B3-B
3
45 65-6930-1 $ —
B4-B
4
5065-6935-1
—
• • • • •
Plant Lite Fixtures – See page 458
• • •
To order
extra trays
SEE PAGE 459
Fluorescent Lights – See page 461-462
• • • • •
Clear Humidity Tents
• Machine sewn, heavy clear vinyl
• Two way zippers on front panel
• Roll-up and tie or flip front flap to open
Catalog
ModelUse w/UnitsNumberPrice
Tent G Fits G3 & G4 Units
65-6975-1 $ —
Tent B Fits B3, & B4 Units
65-6976-1
—
800-325-3055
Tent G
www.hummert.com
Tent B
457
light carts & humidity tents
Full Size Lite Carts
light carts
Full Size Light Cart
Truck ship only
• 1” square aluminum tube frame
• The Model G3A includes 12 - 11” x 22” tan Perma-Nest trays and
the Model G4A includes 16
• The G3A has 3 non-adjustable shelves and the G4A has 4
• Dimensions: 74” H x 53” W x 23” D
• 3” heavy duty wheels
• Bright aluminum finish
• Plastic tent available for cart “G” on page 457
• Fixtures are NOT included with cart and must be purchased separately
Shelves/Trays/
ModelUnitUnit
G3A
3
12
G4A
4
16
Wt Catalog
LbsNumber Price
70
65-6922-1
$—
7065-6924-1
—
Plant Lites
PLANT LITES slim-line design makes them only 2” high. Their all
aluminum body with white enamel finish offers a cooler operating
temperature than steel fixtures. On/off switch allows fixtures to be
controlled individually. Each fixture includes a 3-wire grounded
48” cord and receptacle. The SLIDE PLANT LITES have knobs on
each end for easy adjustment. The CHAIN PLANT LITES have 2 18” chains that adjust in 1⁄2” increments.
Dimensions: PLD-42 - 48” L x 15” W x 2” H
PLD-44 - 48” L x 19” W x 2” H
NOTE: Fluorescent T-12 tubes not included
Catalog
ModelSizeNumberPrice
Slide Plant Lites – without Lamps
PLD-42-S
PLD-44-S
2-40W tube fixture
4-40W tube fixture
65-6941-1
65-6946-1
$—
—
Chain Plant Lites – without Lamps
PLD-42-C
PLD-44-C
2-40W tube fixture
4-40W tube fixture
65-6940-1
65-6945-1
$—
—
•The built-in electronic ballasts can light up all
lights or any combination, plus all off/on
• 6 lamps are included: 4 growlight plus 2 full
spectrum to provide selectable lighting for
various ornamental plants and flowers
• Adjustable bottom shelf
32 watt Growlight Pro
•4 pre-assembled, linked 8w T5 growlights in
each fixture
•Size: 19.5” W x 15” D x 17.5” H
56 watt Super Growlight Pro
32 watt Growlight Pro
47-2550-1 1-11
47-2550-2 12 & up
458
$—
—
800-325-3055
•4 pre-assembled, linked 14w T5 growlights in
each fixture
•Size: 25.5” W x 19.5” D x 26.5” H
56 watt Super Growlight Pro
47-2555-1 1-11
47-2555-2 12 & up
www.hummert.com
$—
—
Sunlighter Plant Display Stands
Fiberglass Trays
Molded fiberglass trays measure 49” L x 20” W x 1-1/2” D, and
fits both the Flora-Cart and Lite Carts. Trays are strong, rust-proof,
lightweight, leakproof and won’t dent. Smooth surfaces are easily
cleaned. Convenient drain with plug for removal of excess water
without loss of plant material.
65-6920-1
$—
Accessories
Model SL48
Size: 70” H x 25” W x 23” D
Model SL44
Size: 70” H x 25” W x 12” D
• Plant stands are made with 1” square aluminum tubing
• Model SL44 is provided with 4 - 22” x 11” green Perma-Nest Trays
and the model SL48 is supplied with 8
• There are 4 non-adjustable shelves per stand
• Light fixtures sold separately if desired
7 Day Digital Timer
125VAC, 15 AMP, 1,800 Watts
18-6346-1
$—
turns ON/OFF
•Automatically
lighting, solenoids, 1626D
misting controller, etc
day can be schedule
•Each
differently
daylight saving
•Automatic
time option
•Automatic adjusts to sunrise/
sunset time for dusk/dawn
setting
ON/OFF’s per day &
•Multiple
manual temporary override
•Battery backup
•2 time grounded receptacles
•Model DT620
24 Hour Mechanical
Timer
125VAC, 15AMP, 1,750 Watts
•Grounded plug and outlet
ON/OFF settings per day and
•3manual
override
•Outlet on side of timer
plastic dial acts as a
•Transparent
night light
•Model TN311C
18-6348-1
$—
800-325-3055
PERMA-NEST TRAYS
• Made of heavyweight plastic
• Can be cold-sterilized
• Excellent for seedlings,
cuttings, wick watering
• Light green color
• Nest for easy storage
• Does not harbor bacteria
or mold
• Available in 3 sizes: 8” x 12”
x 2-1/2”, 13” x 15” x 3-1/2” and
22” x 11” x 2-1/2” (will hold a
seed flat)
CLEAR DOMES
• Made of heavy duty clear
plastic
• Protects delicate seedlings &
provides constant humidity
• Cover is 3” high
• Fits 22” x 11” Perma-Nest
Tray only
• Two to three times the
thickness of other domes
PLASTIC GRID
•Enhances humidity and keeps plants from
sitting directly in water
•Fits inside the 22” x 11” Perma-Nest Trays
•Heavy-duty white plastic
Qty/CatalogPC-1PC-2
ItemSize
CsNumberEach Case
Tray
8” x 12” x 2-1⁄2”
18 65-6961-
$ —
$—
Tray 13” x 15” x 3-1⁄2” 665-6962- —
—
Tray
22” x 11” x 2-1⁄2” 1265-6963-
—
—
Clear Dome 22”x11”x 3”
12 65-6964-
—
—
Plastic Grid 19” x 9” x 3⁄8”
1265-6965-
—
—
www.hummert.com
459
plant stands, trays & timers
WtCatalog
ModelLbsNumberPrice
SL44
30 65-6937-1
$—
SL48 7865-6938-1
—
Propagation Lights
PROMOTES UNIFORM AND HEALTHY PLANTS
Supplemental light is a must for all bedding plant
growers who propagate their own seedlings. When
using the Phyto-Lite the grower can be assured of
uniform and healthy seedlings. Not weak and spindly,
because now you are able to control the amount and
duration of light needed, even during the dark-cloudy
winter weather.
Decrease Growing Time & Increase Plant Quality
EFFECTIVE PHOTOPERIOD CONTROL
Optimum photoperiod for seedling development is 15-16
hours, while optimum light intensity for most seedlings
is 300-350 footcandles. The diagram below indicates
amount of footcandles at various levels and positions.
MORE FOOTCANDLES PER SQUARE FOOT
The Phyto-Lite is a real space saver as it allows the
grower to produce an enormous amount of seedlings in
a relatively small area. For example, when the Phyto-Lite
is placed 18” above plant height it has the capacity to
produce enough footcandles to cover an area of 45 sq ft
or 24 F1020 flats.
All PHYTO-LITEs come with cord, plug, chain and hanging brackets
please note:
Because the needs of each grower vary with crop,
fluorescent lamps are not included and must be
ordered separately.
See Page
461-462
for Lamps
propagation lighting
4’ Fluorescent Fixtures
Vapor Proof
SPECIFICATIONS:
Model 832
Capacity: 8 - 32 Watt T-8
Fluorescent Lamps (Size 48”)
Size: 2’ X 4’ X 41⁄2” Deep
Weight: 45 Lbs
Voltage: 120 Volts
Model 1632
Capacity: 16 - 32 Watt T-8
Fluorescent Lamps (Size 48”)
Size: 2’ X 8’ X 41⁄2” Deep
Weight: 90 Lbs
Voltage: 120 Volts
2’ x 4’
2’ x 8’
• 2 bulb with lens
• Uses T-8 bulbs
• Vapor proof design
Model 832 Model 1632 47-0840-1
47-0850-1
$—
—
Truck ship only
8’ Vapor Proof Fixtures
• 3 bulb with lens
• Uses T-8 bulbs
• Vapor proof design
• Made for commercial use with
high quality ballast for long life
• Equipped with energy saving
ballast
• Each fixture is equipped for
rapid start and uses 40 watt
T-8 lamps
• Vapor proof models feature
an unbreakable polycarbonate
lens, ideal for dusty, damp, or
wet locations
Model Description
V2T8 2 Lite Vapor
V3T8 3 Lite Vapor
460
Wt
7 Lbs
7 Lbs
• Available in both 2 and 3 tube
models
• Comes with external mounting
brackets, 10’ cord and plug
and pull switch
• Fluorescent tubes are not
included and must be ordered
separately
Catalog
Number
47-086047-0862-
800-325-3055
PC-1
1-9
$—
—
PC-2
10 & Up
$—
—
• An inexpensive lighting system to provide the maximum amount
of lighting over a large area
• The channels require assembly and are ready to be wired into system
• No cord or plug included
• Holds four, 32 watt T-8 1” fluorescent lamps (not included)
• Equipped with energy saving ballast
• Size: 96” L x 4.5” W x 3.75” H
Truck ship only
Catalog
Number
Model
Description
4XT8-VP 4 Tube Vapor Proof 47-0832-
PC-1
1-9
$—
PC-2
10 & Up
$—
www.hummert.com
Sun Blaze T5 Fixtures
• Wider advanced reflector design offers excellent
reflectivity and diffusion
• White powder coated steel housing
• Wire cable hangers included with every fixture
• Can be mounted horizontally or vertically
• 12’ power cord and on/off switch allows for easy operation. Eight
lamp model features on/off switches to run four lamps at a time if
desired
• Louvered for cool operation
• High output lamps have an extremely high lumen per watt rating
• Runs on 120V power only
• Daisy chain feature allows multiple fixtures to be plugged in
together
• 5 year warranty on ballast components
• Includes spectralux 6500º lamps
Size
CatalogPC-1PC-2
Description
L x W x HNumber
1-6
7 & up
4’-2 Lamp 50.2” x 9.5” x 4.2” 47-1300-
$ —
$—
4’-4 Lamp 50.2” x 14.2” x 4” 47-1310-
—
—
4’-6 Lamp
50” x 19” x 4”
47-1306-
—
—
4’-8 Lamp
50” x 24” x 4”
47-1308-
—
—
SHIPPED FOB:
Nashville
• Designed to accommodate AgroLED® LED Tubes - T8 size (sold
separately). 44 accommodates 4 LED tubes and 48 accommodates
8 LED tubes
• Complete flexibility to mix & match different colored lamps for
desired spectrum
• Energy efficient – typical power reduction of 20% or more
• Instant illumination on start up
• Environmentally friendly
• Cool operation allows closer placement to plants
• Fixtures and optional lamps are durable and contain no fragile glass
• Housing is made of heavy-duty white steel
• Grounded 120 volt
47-1320-1 4 Lamp Fixture
$—
8 foot power cord
47-1322-1 8 Lamp Fixture
—
SHIPPED FOB:
AgroLED T8 LED Lamps
• 22 watt 4’ T8 size LED lamp, 148 lumens each
• Self-ballasted - No separate ballast required. Not for retro fitting
existing T8 fluorescent fixtures
• Lamp lifetime is over 50,000 hours
• Flicker-free operation with instant illumination.
• T8 LED tube Red has 288 red LED’s. Spectral Wavelengths of
660nm
• The T8 LED White/Blue tube has 144 blue and 144 white LED’s.
Spectral wavelength of 5500k/420nm (50/50 split)
• No fragile glass
• Energy efficient and environmentally friendly
• Cool operation allows closer placement to plants
• 1 year warranty
47-1330-1Red LED
$—
47-1332-1 White/Blue LED
—
SHIPPED FOB:
2 tube open fixture uses T- 8 bulbs
• Made for commercial use with high quality ballast for long life
• Each fixture comes with white enamel reflectors
• Comes complete with cord, plug, and pull switch
• Energy saving ballast included
• Fixture is equipped for rapid start and uses 40 watt T-8 lamps
• Size: Length, 48”; Width, 12.5”; Height, 4.75”
• Vaporproof models feature an unbreakable polycarbonate lens, ideal
for dusty, damp, or wet locations. Available in both 2 and 4 tube
models
• Comes with external mounting brackets
• Fluorescent tubes are not included and must be ordered separately
CatalogPC-1PC-2
ModelDescription Wt/lbsNumber
1-9
10 & Up
T-8 2 Tube Fixture 16 47-0805-
$ —
$—
T-8 4 Tube Fixture 20 47-0815-
—
—
Truck ship only
800-325-3055
Nashville
Nashville
T-5 Fluorescent
High Output Lamps
• Available in warm (3000°) and cool (6500°)
• Designed only to be used in high output fixtures,
such as the image above
• Length: 4 ft
• UPS Shipping is at customer’s risk!
CatalogPC-1PC-2
KelvinNumberEach
Case of 30
3,000º
47-1270-
$ —
$—
6,500º47-1272-
—
—
SHIPPED FOB:
Washington
www.hummert.com
461
light fixtures
4’ Fluorescent Fixtures T-12
AgroLED Fixtures
Fluorescent Lamps & Fixtures
Gro Lite Wide Spectrum
A high quality plant growth lamp for use in all greenhouse applica­
tions, florist displays, and home planters. Tubes have a CRI (color
rendition index) of 89 and a 3400° Kelvin temperature. A broad
spectrum light with a pink appearance.
ModelTube Qty/CatalogPC-1PC-2
NumberSize Watts CaseNumberEach
Case
F32T8GL/WS 48” 32 30 47-1260-
$ —
$—
F96T12GL/WS96” 75 15 47-1262-
—
—
UPS at Customer’s Own Risk
Cool White - A standard fluorescent “super saver” tube for everyday lighting needs for plants and other uses. Emits light strongly in
violet, blue and yellow.
lamps & LS environmental screens
Wide Spectrum Gro-Lux - Light emitted is balanced over
the entire spectrum. Light from the far red band is also enhanced.
Excellent for supplemental greenhouse lighting or for interiors receiving no sunlight. It is unnecessary to combine this lamp with incandescent illumination.
Tube CatalogPC-1PC-2
Size WattsNumberEach
Case of 30
T-12 - 1.5” Diameter
Cool White48” 3447-1050-
$ —$ —
Wide Spectrum48” 40 47-1148-
— —
T-8 - 1” Diameter
Cool White
48” 32 47-1049-
$ —
$—
UPS at Customer’s Own Risk
Instant Sun®’s new blend of 4 rare phosphors produces a biologically
beneficial white light which duplicates the natural light of the sun.
With a substantially improved distribution of light energy, especially
in the red/far red end of the spectrum, Instant Sun fosters aggressive
bud setting and flowering with longer lasting blooms. Ample blues
make for sturdy compact plants. Instant Sun emits 94.5% of the
sun’s natural spectrum. The lamp life of the T-12 40 watt, 4’ tube
is guaranteed by the manufacturer for 3 years. CRI: 94 and a 6280º
Kelvin temp
UPS at Customer’s Own Risk
Tube
CatalogPC-1PC-2
Size WattsNumberEach Case of 12
48”
40
47-1241-
$ —
$—
Environmental Screens
Energy Saving
XLS ULTRA REVOLUX: ideal for saving energy
– night and day. It combines good heat retention with high light diffusion and transmission
of light.
Energy Saving & Solar Reflection
XLS ULTRA FIREBREAK: the industry standard
for both energy and shade for commercial
greenhouses. While not flame retardant, each
panel has tow, integrated Firebreak sections
intended to limit panel spread effectively reducing risk of catastrophic fire loss.
XLS REVOLUX: the patented, industry standard
flame retardant material for both energy and
shade for greenhouses subject to fire codes like
schools, institutions and retail locations.
XLS HARMONY REVOLUX: Harmony means
light diffusion. Most plants benefit from an even
spreading of light which helps avoid hot spots
and increases light penetration deeper into the
plant canopy. Harmony utilizes white film strips
rather than aluminum foils. While not as energy
efficient as aluminum, the cooling effect is better
and the light passing through the films is completely diffused and widely spread.
462
800-325-3055
Solar Reflection
XLS F FIREBREAK: effectively cools the greenhouse by reflecting sunlight while its open
structure allows airflow. During the night it helps
reduce radiated heat loss from the plants, minimizing the formation of dew on the crop and the
risk of fungal diseases. Each climate screen has
approx 16” of firebreak along both sides, intended to limit screen-to-screen fire spread.
XLS F REVOLUX: effectively reflects sunlight
while its open structure allows airflow and cooling of the greenhouse. During the night it helps
reduce radiated heat loss from the plants, minimizing the formation of dew on the crop and
the risk of fungal diseases. This is the optimum
choice for all installations from a fire safety perspective.
XLS F HARMONY REVOLUX: a white screen
with an open structure for enhanced light diffusion and shading. On warm days it protects,
cools, and brings light to the plants from many
angles – stimulating growth. At night it helps
reduce radiated heat loss, minimizing the formation of dew and the risk of fungal diseases.
Revolux means flame retardant and is the optimum choice
for all installations from a fire safety perspective.
Continued on next page
www.hummert.com
Environmental Screens - continued
Blackout Cloth
Outdoor Shading
XLS OBSCURA FIREBREAK & XLS OBSCURA
REVOLUX: consist of a 2 layer blackout cloth
for creating short days while saving tremendous
amounts of energy. The upper layer is all aluminum for unparalleled heat retention and reflectivity to keep cool when pulled during daylight
hours. The under layer blocks light leaks from
the upper layer and is available in B/B, black on
both sides.
FLS: an outside screen that protects the crop
and controls the climate. During the day, the
screen’s open structure provides solar reflection and cooling - reducing both greenhouse
temperature and plant temperature. At night, it
helps reduce radiated heat loss from the plants.
Its structure stimulates aluminum and doesn’t
allow light transmission through the film, making
it possible to have a reflective, open shade. FLS
can be used for rolling, sliding or fixed screen
installations.
Weather Protection
— Are you —
planning to build?
LS SOLARWOVEN: a double-laminated, triple
layer, woven poly-film product with an anticondensate layer on one side. It has all the
advantages of a greenhouse film but with a
superior strength and life expectancy. It can also
be used as a rolling sidewall or as a retractable
roof where cables, fabric keys and hems can be
added to finish.
Call our Greenhouse Department!
We can design a Greenhouse for you
Price per square foot
PC-1PC-2PC-3
Interior/
%
% Light % Trans. % Energy Catalog 100 -1,000 - 5,000
ModelExteriorShadeDirectDiffusedSavingsNumber
999 4,999 & Up Base Widths Available
Energy Saving
XLS10 Ultra RevoluxInterior 15
85
76
47 27-3130-$ —$ —$ —
13.1’, 14.1’, 17.4’
70
57
45
35
25
14
45
37
31
60
50
39
28
62
50
39
32
24
14
41
34
29
56
46
35
27
49 27-3113- $ —$ —$ —14.1’
52 27-3114- —
—
— 11’, 13.1’, 14.1’, 15.4’
5727-3115- —
—
— 11’, 13.1’, 14.1’, 15.4’
62 27-3116- —
—
— 11’, 13.1’, 14.1’
67 27-3117- —
—
— 11’, 13.1’, 14.1’
72 27-3118- —
—
—13.1’
55
27-3135-
—
—
— 11’, 13.1’, 14.1’
6027-3136- —
—
— 11’, 13.1’, 14.1’
6527-3137- —
—
— 11’, 13.1’, 14.1’
4727-3160- —
—
—13.1’, 15.4’
4727-3162- —
—
— 13.1’, 15.4’
4727-3164- —
—
— special order
4727-3166- —
—
— special order
39
27
19
47
38
32
75
67
55
48
37
27
19
43
36
28
69
63
52
45
25 27-3126-$ —$ —$ — 13.1’, 14.1’
3027-3127- —
—
—13.1’
3527-3128- —
—
— 13.1’
20
27-3170-
— — —13.1’
25
27-3171-
— — — special order
27
27-3172-
— — —13.1’
1527-3180- —
—
— special order
1527-3181- —
—
— special order
2027-3182- —
—
—15.4’
2027-3183- —
—
— 13.1’, 14.1’, 17.4
<.1
<.1
<.1
<.1
75
75
27-3142- $ —$ —$ —13.1’, 14.1’
27-3143-
—
—
—13.1’
85
78
40
27-3193-
62
49
33
59
45
30
10 27-3190-$ —$ —$ —
15
27-3191-
— — —
20
27-3192-
— — —
Energy Saving & Solar Reflection
Solar Reflection
XLS16 F FirebreakInterior 61
XLS17 F FirebreakInterior 73
XLS18 F FirebreakInterior 86
*XLS15 F RevoluxInterior
53
*XLS16 F RevoluxInterior
62
*XLS17 F RevoluxInterior
68
*XLS25 F Harmony RevoluxInterior 25
*XLS35 F Harmony RevoluxInterior 33
*XLS45 F Harmony RevoluxInterior 45
*XLS55 F Harmony RevoluxInterior 52
Blackout Cloth
XLS Obscura A/A + B/B FirebreakInterior 99.9
*XLS Obscura A/A + B/B RevoluxInterior
99.9
Weather Protection
LS SolarwovenExterior
15
$ —
$ —
$ —
8.9’, 13.1’
Outdoor Shading
FLS 40Exterior 38
FLS 50Exterior
51
FLS 60Exterior
67
SHIPPED FOB:
800-325-3055
12.0’, 15.4’, 17.4’
14.1’, 15.4’, 17.4’
15.4’, 17.4’
North Carolina
www.hummert.com
463
LS environmental screens
XLS13 Ultra FirebreakInterior 30
XLS14 Ultra FirebreakInterior 43
XLS15 Ultra Firebreak Interior 55
XLS16 Ultra FirebreakInterior 65
XLS17 Ultra FirebreakInterior 75
XLS18 Ultra FirebreakInterior 86
*XLS15 Revolux
Interior
55
*XLS16 Revolux
Interior 63
*XLS17 RevoluxInterior 69
*XLS40 Harmony RevoluxInterior 40
*XLS50 Harmony RevoluxInterior 50
*XLS60 Harmony Revolux
Interior 61
*XLS70 Harmony RevoluxInterior 72
Aluminet ® Shade Cloth
Aluminet® - the Next Step in Shade Cloth
Aluminet® is a highly reflective, metalized HDPE knitted screen covered with a special anti-oxidation coating.
Aluminet® provides maximum radiation reflection on both sides,
night and day. It can reduce heat inside structures and help effective
heat preservation under the screen. The fabric increases light and
evens out irradiation transfer in the range from UV to far IR.
Aluminet® can provide energy savings from 12-36% depending
upon percentage of shade.
• Rated for outside with UV resistance for
approximately 4 years
• Reflects and diffuses sunlight
• Helps plants stay cooler and saves energy
• Anti-oxidation coating
• Reduces wind speed
• Resists rips, tears and frays
• Standard widths: 9.85', 13.1', 19.8' & 26.2'
PAK aluminet shade cloth
30%
Description
Aluminet 30%
Aluminet 50%
Aluminet 70%
50%
Percentage
of Shade
30-35%
50-55%
70-74%
70%
Hole
Size
6 x 8 mm
3 x 6 mm
2 x 3 mm
Reflection
30%
50%
70%
Diffused
Light
79%
60%
44%
Energy
Saving
12%
15%
36%
Weight
1.5 oz/yd2
2.24 oz/yd2
2.74 oz/yd2
Catalog
Number
27-807027-806527-8067-
P
rice
PC-1
100999
$—
—
—
per sq foot
PC-2
PC-3
1000- 5000 &
4999
Up
$—
$—
—
—
—
—
Aluminet Fabrication Charges
Decription
Edge taping
#2 Grommets
Hemming
Seaming
Slitting
When seaming or taping, always allow 4% more in length.
SHIPPED FOB:
Georgia
Price per
linear foot
each
linear foot
linear foot
linear foot
Catalog
Number
27-8072-1
27-8010-1
27-8074-1
27-8076-1
27-8078-1
Price
$—
—
—
—
—
CUSTOM SEWING & FABRICATION CHARGES EXPLAINED
EDGE TAPING – Custom sewn around the perimeter of the panel
with 2-3/4” polypropylene tape folded over edges and double
stitched. This prevents unraveling and must be ordered for
grommet installation.
GROMMETS – #2 5/6” grommets, spaced to your specifications.
HEM EDGES – Fabric edges are folded back and sewn to create
hem pockets which will accommodate a 1” or 2”OD pipe
insertion. Price per linear foot of edge. Hemmed edges cannot
be used with grommets. This should only be used if suspended
on wires indoors or a situation where there is no wind.
SEAMING – This is necessary whenever two or more panels
are sewn together to create a customized size. All seams
strengthened with 2: 3/4” reinforcement webbing tape.
SLITTING –Should it be necessary to fabricate from a standard size
fabric to custom width, a slitting charge per total linear footage
will be added.
RE-ROLL – Should a customer require fabric in rolls, this charge
would be applied to total square feet of order. Maximum roll
width 16’.
Please note: All special order/cut to length items are not returnable
Edge Taping
464
Grommetting
800-325-3055
Hemming
Seaming
Slitting
www.hummert.com
Knit Shade Fabric
• PAK Knit Shade is made of UV resistant, long-lasting, high
density polypropylene
• The fabric has strength and flexibility, and resists ripping, tearing
and fraying
• Knit fabrics can be installed with clips or by using tape and
grommets
• Rugged, knitted design
• UV resistant for long lifespan
• Water permeable
• Reduces wind speed
• Bulk roll available
• 12’ standard widths but can be customized for any application
• Call for a custom shade cloth quote
WHITE
30%
GREEN
50%
30%
50%
BLACK
70%
30%
50%
70%
Woven Shade Fabric
PAK’s field-proven, woven shade fabrics are designed to stand up
to the elements. Woven from extra-tough extruded yarns, they are
manufactured in a highly controlled process and quality inspected
at every step. The end result is a durable shade fabric with a low
shrinkage factor and high dimensional stability. This combination
makes for one of the most durable outdoor shade fabrics in the
world.
SHIPPED FOB: Georgia
• UV resistant polypropylene
• Water and air permeable
Please Note:
• Mildew and abrasion resistant
All special order/
• Helps protect from wind and birds
cut-to-length
• Not affected by most chemicals
items are special
order only and can
• High tensile strength
not be returned
• Standard widths on all percentages are
6’, 10’, 12’
• Call for custom shade cloth quote
% Shade Weight
30% 1.8 oz/yd2
47% 2.7 oz/yd2
55% 3.1 oz/yd2
63% 3.3 oz/yd2
73% 3.8 oz/yd2
80% 4.5 oz/yd2
95% 6.5 oz/yd2
SHIPPED FOB:
30%
63%
NOTE: Sewing
specifications for
Price per square foot
Woven Fabrics add 3% in usage
Catalog PC-1
PC-2
PC-3
Number 100-999 1,000-9,99910,000 & Up of knits.
Width: ±2”/seam
27-8084-$ —$ —$ —
(min ±2”) 27-8086-
—
—
—
Length: +1-2%
(min +2’)
27-8088-
—
—
—
Example: 12’ x
27-8090-
—
—
—
100’ finished will
27-8092-
—
—
—
measure 12’ x
27-8094-
—
—
—
104’ usage
27-8096-
—
—
—
Georgia
800-325-3055
47%
73%
55%
80%
95%
Woven Fabrication Charges
Catalog
Description
Price per
Number Price
Edge taping
linear foot 27-8005-1 $ —
#2 Grommets each
27-8010-1
—
Seaming (1-2) linear foot 27-8008-1
—
Seaming (3-4) linear foot 27-8014-1
—
Slitting
linear foot 27-8009-1
—
Hemming (1-4”)linear foot 27-8006-1
—
CHARGES APPLICABLE TO ALL ORDERS
Minimum order charge
Orders under $ 200.00
Small Panel charge
Panels under 250 sq ft
27-8011-1
$—
27-8012-1
—
www.hummert.com
465
PAK knit & woven shade fabric
Knit Fabrication Charges
Price per square foot
Catalog
Catalog PC-1
PC-2
PC-3
Price per
Number Price
% Shade Color
Weight
Number
100-999 1,000-9,999 10,000 & Up Description
Edge taping
linear foot 27-8260-1 $ —
30%
White
7.0 oz/yd227-8080- $ —$ —$ —
#2 Grommets each
27-8010-1
—
50% White3.5 oz/yd227-8240-
—
—
—
Seaming (1-2) linear foot 27-8261-1
—
30%Green 3.0 oz/yd227-8030-
—
—
—
Slitting
linear foot 27-8262-1
—
50% Green 5.5 oz/yd227-8032-
—
—
—
Hemming
(1-4”)linear
foot
27-8082-1
—
2
70% Green 7.5 oz/yd 27-8034-
—
—
—
NOTE: Sewing specifications for Knitted Fabrics 30% Black 3.0 oz/yd227-8035-
—
—
—
add 3.5% in usage of knits.
50%Black 5.5 oz/yd227-8037-
—
—
—
Width: ±2”/seam (min ±2”) • Length: +1-2% (min +2’)
70% Black 7.5 oz/yd227-8039-
—
—
—
Example: 12’ x 100’ finished will measure 12’ x 104’ usage
Knitted Shade Cloth
DeWitt’s Knitted Shade Cloth is made from
KNITTED
100% UV stabilized polyethylene. Its unique lock
OPTIONS
stitch construction allows customers the ability
to cut the fabric with scissors without further
30%
50%
White
unraveling. Knitted Shade is available in a variety
or colors and shade densities.
40%
60%
Dark Green
• UV treated, lightweight, won’t unravel when
50%
65%
Ultra Tan
cut
• Bulk rolls are available for racks see page 467
60%
87%
Forest Green
• Attach with DeWitt clip-its on page 467
70%
87%
Steel Grey
• Order taping and grommets separately.
Specify grommet spacing on center in inches
80%
• Please note: All special order/cut-to-length
90%
items are special order and not returnable
• Lead times can vary greatly, so please order in
advance of need
Price per square foot
% Shade
Catalog
PC-1
PC-2
PC-3
& Color
Model
Standard Widths Number
100 - 999
1,000 - 9,999
10,000 & up
30% Black
KS30
6’, 10’, 12’, 14’, 20’, 26’, 32’ 27-8704-
$ —
$ —
$—
40% Black
KS40
6’, 10’, 12’, 20’, 26’, 32’ 27-8706-
—
—
—
50% Black
KS50
6’, 8’, 10’, 12’, 20’, 26’, 32’
27-8705-
—
—
—
60% Black
KS60
6’, 8’, 10’, 12’, 20’, 26’, 32’ 27-8707-
—
—
—
70% Black
KS70
6’, 8’, 10’, 12’, 15’, 20’, 26’, 32’ 27-8703-
—
—
—
80% Black
KS80
6’, 10’, 12’, 20’, 26’, 32’ 27-8708-
—
—
—
90% Black
KS90
6’, 8’, 10’, 12’, 20’, 26’, 32’
27-8709-
—
—
—
60% Green
KS60G
6’, 10’, 12’, 20’, 26’, 32’ 27-8710-
—
—
—
50% White
KS50W
6’, 10’, 12’, 20’, 26’
27-8712-
—
—
—
DeWitt knit & woven shade cloth
Please call for pricing on Ultra Tan, Forest Green and Steel Grey
Woven Shade Cloth
DeWitt’s Woven Shade Cloth is made from 100%
polypropylene monofilament strands. It is UV
stabilized to hold up under the most extreme solar
conditions. Woven Shade can be used for a variety of
applications: wind and privacy screens, shading for
sports and recreation, livestock, patios, dog kennels
and solar protection for plants
• UV treated
• Heavy and strong
• 100% polypropylene material
Woven
optionS
30%
47%
55%
63%
73%
80%
% Shade
& Color
Model
Standard Widths 30% Black
WS30
10’, 12’
47% Black
WS47
6’, 10’, 12’, 15’
55% Black
WS55
6’, 10’, 12’, 15’
63% Black
WS63
6’, 10’, 12’, 15’
73% Black
WS73
4’, 6’, 7.5’, 10, 12.5’, 15’
80% Black
WS80
6’, 10’, 12’, 15’
Catalog
Number
27-8804-
27-8806-
27-8808-
27-8810-
27-8812-
27-8814-
PC-1
100 - 999
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
Price per square foot
PC-2
PC-3
1,000 - 9,999
10,000 & up
$ —
$—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Custom Sewing and Fabrication Charges
Custom sizes or orders of knitted or woven shade cloth available. Call for a full shade cloth quotation.
Grommets installed
Tape to reinforce edges
Seams to join panel widths
Less than 300 sq ft
466
27-8750-1
27-8751-1
27-8753-1
27-8758-1
800-325-3055
$ —
—
—
—
each
per linear foot
per linear foo
per paner
Freight Prepaid on $1000.00 + Order
All Others FOB Factory
SHIPPED FOB:
Missouri
www.hummert.com
Bulk Knitted
Shade Fabric
• 60% Black Knit Shade
• Same quality shade cloth as on the previous page
• Cut-to-length, stocked in our warehouse for immediate
shipment
Ready Made Shade Fabric
• Due to the seasonal demand of shade cloth, we offer finished
stock panels available for immediate shipment
• Sizes below are 60% knitted black shade with taping and grommets 2’ on center
• Many sizes, colors and percentages of shade available, call for
more information
60%
Lin. Ft.
Catalog
PC-1
PC-2
Width
/Roll
Number Lin Ft Roll
Cut To Length (10’ minimum per piece)
12’
300’27-8800-$ —$ —
Bulk rolls not on a core
6’
100’ 27-8790-
—
$—
12’
100’ 27-8791-
—
—
Size
10’ x 12’
12’ x 20’
20’ x 24’
Catalog
Number
27-8600-1
27-8604-1
27-8608-1
Price
Each
$—
—
—
Shade Fabric Accessories
Clip-its are a quick and easy alternative to brass grommets. They
can be used on virtually any type of
screen or mesh type fabric and are
easily installed right on site without
special equipment. DeWitt ClipIts are made from 100% recycled
plastic. See page 541 to purchase
the poly twine needed to secure the
CLIP-ITS to your fabric.
Quantity Package of 6
Case of 25 Packages Bulk Case of 300 Aluminet and Clip-its attached to wire rope.
Catalog Number
27-8714-1 27-8714-2
27-8715-1
Price
$ —
—
—
Quick-Tys
Length
8”
11.8”
14.6”
Qty/Catalog
Bag Number
100 51-6120-
100 51-6125-
100 51-6130-
shade fabric & accessories
DeWitt Clip-Its™
Turnbuckle with cable clamps
PC-1
1-9
$ —
—
—
PC-2
10 & Up
$—
—
—
PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE
While the prices listed are always current at the time of publication, they
do change over the time frame of our catalog. To alleviate any
problems this may cause, please call for current pricing or visit our website
800-325-3055
Wire rope kit: 1-galvanized cable, 1 turnbuckle and clamps.
Gutter eye bolt kit: 1-eyebolt, 1-bond and seal washer and
2 nuts (should be installed every 8-12 feet down gutter or base/ease
board).
Wire rope attachment kit: 2-eyebolts, 2-bond and seal
washers and 4 nuts (drilling may be required for installation).
Catalog
Length
NumberPrice
50’ Wire Rope Kit
25-1080-1
$—
100’ Wire Rope Kit
25-1081-1
—
150’ Wire Rope Kit
25-1082-1
—
Gutter Eye Bolt Kit25-1083-1
—
Wire Rope Attachment Kit
25-1084-1
—
www.hummert.com
467
Pressure Treated Wood Lath
The lath is made of specially selected spruce wood slats 3/8” thick x 1-½” wide. Each wood slat is bound together with double strands of 14
gauge galvanized wire. Each wood slat is spaced 1-¼” apart (55% closed area; 45% open area).
Two sizes available:
Perfect for
• 6’ wide: bound together with 7 double strands of galvanized wire
benches or
• 4’ wide: bound together with 5 double strands of galvanized wire
shade
Greenhouse Bench
• Versatile
• Easy to assemble
• Improved air circulation
if used for benching
• Recommended for 3”
size pots or larger
26” High
2” x 4”
7’ or 8’ Apart
Cement
Block
Photo courtesy of the Botany
Center, Knoxville, TN
461⁄2”
wood lath & weather barrier
Nursery
Shade
Recommended Framework Lath Shade House
• Provides 55% shade
• Use pressure treated
poles or treated 4” x 4”
posts for uprights
• Install with the pickets
running north and south
for the shade to follow
the sun
Photo Courtesy of Bayer Garden Center,
Imperial, MO
SHIPPED FOB:
Wt/
Size
Roll
4’ x 50’ 112 lbs
6’ x 50’ 170 lbs
Catalog
Number
27-0450-
27-0650-
Georgia
PC-1
PC-2
PC-3
1-9 Rolls
10-24 Rolls 25 Rolls & Up
$ —$ —$ —
—
—
—
1212-C
1212-C WEATHER
BARRIER
Weather Barrier
•
•
•
•
Blocks wind and rain
Highly UV stabilized
5 to 7 year life
Often used in high
winds, unique tear
resistance
Special Note: the blue strip in
the samples illustrates the relative
opacity/transparency of the various fabrics
468
800-325-3055
Ideal for roll up walls, zone barriers in gutter connected
greenhouses and covering material for sidewalls and endwalls
of greenhouses and cold frames. Pak 1212-C Weather Barrier is
a slightly stiff, heavy duty, woven, coated polyethylene which
blocks wind and rain and helps reduce heat loss. The fabric is
semi-transparent (somewhat clear) and allows about 75% light
transmission. 1212-C’s rugged nature makes it well suited for
windy applications and high UV stabilization ensure long life
span.
27-8110-1Call for pricing
8010
PAK 8010 WEATHER
BARRIER
Same application as 1212-C but is lighter weight. Pak 8010
Weather Barrier is a durable, lightweight, woven, coated polyethylene. The double sided 1.5 mil coating allows the fabric
to block wind and rain and helps prevent heat loss. Pak 8010
is semi-opaque (white) and allows 85% sunlight transmission
and 15% shade factor. The fabric is highly UV stabilized for
extended life span.
27-8098-1Call for pricing
www.hummert.com
Kool Ray Liquid Shading
Kool Ray Classic
Super Concentrated Liquid Shade
Back in its “Classic” EzyOff formula, Kool Ray is
specifically designed to
lower inside greenhouse
temperatures during the
warmer spring and summer
months. Throughout
the year, Classic’s
environmentally friendly
ingredients will slowly wear
off, allowing for increased
light levels as the daylight
decreases. Kool Ray is
a concentrated formula
designed to be diluted with
water and works best when
applied by spray, but brush
or roller may also be used.
Standard dilution rate: 1 part Kool Ray to 8 parts
water. For a denser shade, several lighter, more diluted coats are
recommend over a single, less diluted, heavy coat.
After dilution, spray coverage is approximately 1,575 sq ft (175
sq ft/gal). If you desire a longer wear and better adhesion of Kool
Ray, just add X-tra Stick.
X-Tra Stick
For use with Kool Ray Liquid Shade
X-Tra Stick is an adhesive additive for use with Kool
Ray that increases adhesion, wear, and overall life of
the shade. X-Tra Stick is primarily used when shading
glass greenhouses and can be used for plastic but
caution should be taken due to the possibility of
removal problems. Adhesion rates (per gallon conc.) Light: 4 oz,
Medium: 8 oz, and Strong: 12 oz Calculate
X-Tra Stick to the corresponding amount of
concentrate used before diluting with water.
Best to add X-Tra Stick after shade mix has
been diluted with water at the desired ratio. Mix
thoroughly.
Qty/Wt/Catalog PC-1
Size
Case Case Number
Each
*
Kool Ray Classic White
Gallon
5 Gallon
4
1
72 lb
51 lb
45-0240-
45-0242-
PC-2
Case
$ —
—
$—
—
—
—
$—
—
Kool Ray Classic Green
*Gallon
*5 Gallon
4
1
72 lb
51 lb
45-0245-
45-0247-
X-Tra Stick Adhesive Additive
Quart
Gallon
12
4
36 lb
36 lb
45-0230-
45-0235-
$ —
—
$—
—
*
*FreezEable
Visor Greenhouse Liquid Shading
45-0300-1
45-0300-2
2.5 gallon
Case of 2
$—
—
Sun Clear Sprayable Coating
This non-toxic sprayable coating converts the
normal hydrophobic (nonwettable) surface of
all plastics, glass, and metals to a permanent
hydrophilic (wettable) condition. Dripping, which
can promote fungus diseases such as Botrytis,
is eliminated from the roof of greenhouses
and other structures. Up to 50% more light is
transmitted through surfaces treated with Sun
Clear. When more solar energy is transmitted into
a structure, less amounts of energy are required
to maintain a temperature.
Catalog
Size
Number
Price
Quart
26-7020-1
$—
Case of 12
26-7020-2
—
Gallon26-7025-1 —
SHIPPED FOB:
New York
800-325-3055
Sun Clear also works to prevent static charge,
keeping treated surfaces clearer. The result is
greater light transmission because the plastic
accumulates less dirt.
No special equipment is required for application
of Sun Clear. Ordinary blower misters or sprayers
do the job well. No special treatment of surfaces
is necessary. Sun Clear is also completely inert
and non-toxic.
For plastic surfaces: dilute 100:1; for glass 50:1
A quart will cover 5-10,000 sq ft A gallon will
cover 20-40,000 sq ft
Thank You
We appreciate your business
www.hummert.com
469
liquid shading
Visor liquid shading reduces greenhouse
temperatures by diffusing light and reducing
ultraviolet and infrared rays. Formulated to perform
under the most stressful conditions, this temporary
application is safe on all greenhouse-roofing
materials including glass, acrylic, and poly. Visor’s
formulation easily dilutes in water, and allows for
quick and easy dissolving once applied. Uniform
coverage is best achieved by spraying, although
brush and roller application is also possible.
Average Reduction: 8 parts water to 1 part Visor
Approximate Coverage: After an 8 to 1 reduction,
spray coverage is approximately 1575 sq ft
Insect Screen Support Systems
Installing an insect screen support system with LS or PAK insect screen at your greenhouse’s inlet air openings, motorized inlet air shutters, pad vents or roof vents can be a great benefit to your greenhouse operation.
Benefits include: reduced insect populations, use of insecticides and spread of diseases.
Hummert International offers a wide variety of insect screen support systems that can be designed to meet your needs.
Fixed insect screen systems are designed for
single and double roof vents.
6’x30’ insect screen extension
insect screen support systems
Note: Insect screen
should be removed
from the support
system during periods
of high winds, ice and
snow.
Insect screen at slant wall housing exhaust fan
Lean-To Arch designed for pad vent
Designing Your Insect
Screen Support System
In order to design a system for your needs, our design staff will need to know:
• Layout and size of your greenhouse
• Brand, size, HP and speed of your exhaust fans
• Total CFM of the fans
• Static pressure with the fans running
measured by a manometer
• Square footage of inlet opening
• Size of Kool-Cel system
• Insects you are wishing to exclude
Pre-formed Galvanized Rails
designed for motorized shutters
Roof area
glazed with Lexan
Pre-formed rail material consists of 14 gauge galvanized steel. All rails
are sold in stock lengths of 12’. Frame is cut and fitted on site with
common tools. Pre-Formed Rail materials can be used to fabricate
insect screen cover frames for shutters or fans. Insect screen can be
held in place with Wiggle Wire, sold separately.
Straight eave Lean-To
470
800-325-3055
Catalog
Description
Weight
Number
Price
12’ Top Rail
34.25 lb 27-4040-1
$—
12’ Trim Rail – 90º
14.75 lb 27-4041-1
—
12’ Bottom Rail – 74º
11.50 lb 27-4042-1
—
www.hummert.com
Econet Insect Screens
1515
1535
2777
4045
Insect control ventilation screens keep harmful insects outside
the greenhouse and useful insects inside. LS Econet screens are
designed for exceptional performance and long service life, providing consistent hole sizes with high airflow. Excluding pests from
growing areas is the most effective control method. Some growers
have reduced their pesticide use by 90% using LS Econet in combination with insect-free stock and good sanitation.
• Warranty: 5 years under all types of greenhouse covering and 3
years with outdoor use
• Install LS Econet Insect Screens anywhere insects may come in
the greenhouse, including: sidewalls, roof vents, and doors
Hole Size
Econet 1515
Econet 1535
0.15 x 0.15 mm 0.15 x 0.35 mm
LS Econet Tips for Excluding Insects
• LS Econet generally must have openings as small as or smaller
than the insects it excludes.
• Any LS Econet will reduce the number of insects migrating into
crops.
• LS Econet must be sized appropriately to avoid hampering ventilation.
• Keep doors closed, except when entering or leaving the greenhouse. Train employees on function, use and importance.
Consider clean paths for tools, carts. etc.
• Create a positive pressure entrance by installing fans so that they
blow into the space between the doors causing air to flow from
inside to outside.
• LS Econet must be cleaned periodically. Use a stream of water to
wash from inside to out
Econet 2777 Econet 4045 Econet 100400
0.27 x 0.77 mm
0.40 x 0.45 mm
1 x 4 mm
(150 x 150 microns)(150 x 350 microns) (270 x 770 microns)(400 x 450 microns) (1000 x 4000 microns)
Insect Exclusion
Western Flower
Western Flower
Thrips and
Thrips and larger insects
Some Thrips contol
(use 1515 for
better control)
Material
Standard widths
and larger insects
Bumble bee and
other larger insects
Inside/outside Inside/outside Inside/outsideInside/outside
100% Polyolefin
Weight
and larger insects
larger insects
Application
Silverleaf Whitefly Silverlead F Whitefly
90% Polyolefin
Inside
100% Polyolefin
100% Polyolefin
100% Polyolefin
10% Acrylic
3.54 oz/yd2
3.13 oz/yd2
3.30 oz/yd2
2.15 oz/yd2
3.57 oz/yd2
13.78’
6.56’ and 11.15’
11.15’
13.12’ and 16.40’
11.48’
Airflow reduction
45%
40%
32%
25%
5%
Transmission light
91%
95%
90%
96%
90%
Diffused light
76%
82%
79%
88%
82%
Catalog Number
27-3040-
27-3042-
27-3037-
27-3039-
27-3048-
PC-1
$ —
$ —
100-999 sq ft
$ —
$ —
$—
PC-2—— —
——
1000-4,999 sq ft
PC-3—— —
——
5,000 & up
SHIPPED FOB:
800-325-3055
North Carolina
www.hummert.com
471
econet insect screens
Description
100400
Pollination Chambers & Seed
Cage Covers
Pest & Predator
Screens
Characteristics:
• Helps keep out a wide range
of pests and insects
• Reduces the need for chemical pesticide applications
• Reduces down time due to
insect reentry problem
• Gives improved ventilation
• More economical than other
screens
• Limited warranty available
• Special Note: When these
screens become wet, their airflow characteristics are greatly
reduced. Make sure to factor
this in during the design of
your structure
• Resists abrasion, cleans easily
25
Anti-Insect Net
Protect your crops and reduce
your need for pesticides. Pest
control netting is an important
IPM (Integrated Pest Management)
tool. These nets block the entry of
pests into crop environments and
reduce the need to apply pesticides. The fabric is well suited for use
on net houses, greenhouses and hoop
houses/quonsets.
PAK insect screen covers are made of rugged, UV resistant
polypropylene fabric and have a long history of use on insect-proof
cages erected to enclose flowering crops. The covers arrive ready to
install with your choice of edge reinforcement tape, double-stitched
monofilament thread, 12” mud flaps, downward closing zippers,
Velcro flaps or nylon tie-down straps. We custom fabricate your covers to
fit most any size cage from 2’H x 2’W x 2’L to 8’H x 40’W x 200’L or larger.
40
50
Quonset Insect Covers
Anti-Insect Features
insect control screens
• Blocks many types of pests
• Diffuses light for reduced hot spots
• Woven to allow air and water through
• UV stabilized
50
OptiNet
OptiNet™ Dual Thrip Control is a newgeneration net that optically blinds and
repels insects and has been shown to
drastically reduce thrip and whitefly
population.
PAK’s custom-made covers are made of UV resistant, woven,
light-transmitting material that helps exclude unwanted pests and
confine beneficial insects in your quonset or cold frame structure.
The material is also breathable, which aids ventilation and helps
protect crops from sun, wind and rain. Our covers are made from
a lightweight, durable fabric with reinforced seams; UV stabilized,
monofilament, sewing thread and optional solid brass spread
grommets. Our covers can be made to the specific dimensions of
your quonset or cold frame.
OptiNet™ Features
• Lower insect population up to 8X
• Non-toxic, optical, insect blinding effect
• Woven to allow better ventilation
• UV stabilized for extended life
Description PAK insect cover/cage
Contact Hummert International’s Greenhouse Sales and
Design Team for further information and pricing
Insect Netting Fabric
DC0901-W
1”
1”
• Nylon
• White
• Off-white
• Mesh count,
96 x 26 per sq in
• Mesh count,
104 x 94 per sq in
• Minimal width 72”
• Minimal width 60”
• Available in 50’
rolls
• Available in 50’
rolls
$—
—
800-325-3055
27-0332-1
27-0332-2
1-9 rolls
10 & up
$—
—
1”
472
DC0903-W
1”
• Polyester
1-9 rolls
10 & up
Price
Call for pricing
These are very finely weaved fabrics for either rearing or trapping minute insects. These
fabrics can be used inlet shutters to prevent the influx of pests; since the weave is so
fine, consideration must be given for the reduction of air flow.
1”
1”
27-0330-1
27-0330-2
Catalog
Number
27-8220-1
27-0334-1
27-0334-2
DC0900-2
• Nylon
• Off-white
• Mesh count,
150 x 150 per sq in
• Minimal width 53”
• Available in 50’
rolls
• Special order product
1-9 rolls
10 & up
$—
—
www.hummert.com
Maintenance Products
Glazing & Putty Compounds
Rust Grip® Corrosion
Protectant
Puttylastic Natural
• A top glazing sealant for glass
• Save thousands of dollars and prevent rust in
the corrosive greenhouse environment with Rust Grip
• It stops rust and corrosion and protects substrate
far longer than other industrial-grade rust
inhibitors
• Easy-to-use with minimal prep time and no sand
Truck ship only
blasting, one coat of Rust Grip penetrates and seals
45-0260-1
45-0260-2
Gallon
Case of 4
$—
—
Glass Cleaning Crystals
• Quickly removes the hardest film of dirt, or
soot, so as to allow maximum light to enter the
house
• Does not affect paint or putty
• Can also be used to quickly and effectively
remove shading compounds
• Coverage: 1⁄2 lb/gallon water cleans 300-400 sq ft
glass area
• Wash off immediately. Do not allow to remain on glass for
an extended period of time
Truck ship only
45-0188-1
45-0189-1
5 lb
20 lb 12.5 oz aerosol
Case of 24
$—
—
Caulking
NP1 One Part Urethane Sealant
NP1 is used to caulk galvanized steel or aluminum flashing to concrete. Contents is 300 ml –
coverage is 26 linear feet/tube; 1/4”x 1/4” bead.
Limestone grey color.
Silglaze II SCS2800 Series Sealants
Excellent silicone sealant used for caulking polycarbonate panels such as Lexan when used in
aluminum glazing systems. It can accommodate
50% movement. One tube is 10.1 fl. oz. (299 ml).
A 1/4” x 1/4” bead 24’ long will require approximately one tube.
Dow 795 Silicone Caulking
Silicone sealant that is approved caulking for
Exolite. Coverage is approximately 25 linear feet/tube; 1/4” x 1/4” bead. Gray in color.
Description
NP1
GE Silglaze II Clear
GE Silglaze II Alum
Dow 795
Qty/Catalog PC-1 PC-2
CaseNumber Each Case
30
24-8580-
$ —
$ —
24
24-8590-
—
—
24
24-8594-
—
—
12
24-8565-
—
—
800-325-3055
5 Gallon
Cartridge
Case of 10
$—
—
—
Premium Soft Bedding Putty Gun Grade
• For re-setting of bedding greenhouse glass on bars of wood, steel
or aluminum
• Films over in 24 to 48 hours
• Provides a soft, long-lasting cushion for bedded glass that
minimizes breakage and helps maintain a leakproof house for years
• Coverage: About 200 sq. ft. of glass area
• Apply with a caulking gun only
45-0199-1
45-0197-2
5 Gallons
Case of 10 tubes
Vent Tape
Foil Tape
Non-woven tape, designed to
be used at the bottom edges
of the LEXAN sheet above or
below grade. It not only allows
moisture to migrate out of the
channels, but also prevents
any debris from entering
through the bottom. 1” x 36
yds/roll. 108 linear feet
26-6140-11-5
26-6140-2
6 & up
$—
—
maintenance products
• Galvilite is widely used without topcoat in place of hotdip galvanizing
• High-quality cold galvanizing compound based on a
trade secret organic binder which affords true galvanic
anti-corrosion protection to metals
• The dried film of Galvilite is 85% metallic zinc
• Meets and exceeds galvanizing repair specification
• Dry time (set to touch): when ambient air dried, 20-30
minutes at 1.5 mil thickness
• Available in clog-free aerosol form
• Silver finish
45-0320-1
45-0320-2
45-0191-1
45-0192-1
45-0192-2
$—
—
ZRC Galvilite® Galvanizing Repair
on greenhouses and other
structures formulated from
special oils, resins, filters, and
fibers to stay permanently
soft underneath
• Films over quickly
• Color is neutral bronze
• Coverage: 100 sq. ft. of glass
per gallon
Vent Tape
$—
—
Aluminum Foil Tape
Durable indoor/outdoor tape that provides an excellent seal to
increase the panel‘s thermal efficiency, and to repel any moisture
and debris from entering the upper edges of the LEXAN sheet. 1.5”
x 60 yds/roll. 180 linear feet
26-6137-11-5
26-6137-2
6 & up
$—
—
Rack Grease
• Multipurpose grease used for lubricating
rack arms
• Good load carrying capacity
• Offers corrosion protection
• It is recommended to grease all racks at least
once every 12 months but do not grease the
back area of the gear rack
• Proper lubrication will extend the operating life
29-3070-1
1 kg
www.hummert.com
$—
473
Work Tables
Made
in the
USA
These industrial quality work tables are ideal for potting, staging plant material, or general horticulture use. The 30” x 60” tables feature stainless
steel or galvanized tops and a strong galvanized steel lower frame. Worktables are available in several heights. The 30” and 36” models come
with metal feet and the 34” ADA compliant model has threaded adjustable feet. A 6” deep 16” x 21” single bowl sink is standard, deeper sinks or
double bowl sinks can be special ordered for the 30” and 36” models. A galvanized lower shelf is available for the 30” and 36” models to make an
area 24” x 54”. The optional Faucet and strainer set is also ADA compliant.
“A” Frame Benches
Mobile Benches
Worktable
ADA Compliant Worktable with Sink,
Faucet and Sprayer
Mobile Benches
25-6258-1
$—
—
—
—
25-6260-1
25-6262-1
25-6266-1
25-6268-1
$—
—
—
—
25-6246-1
25-6248-1
$—
—
25-6270-1
25-6275-1
$—
—
work tables & potting benches
A drill and other hand
tools are required for
assembly. All benches
are truck ship only.
Custom Work Tables
Custom work tables maximize your available space. We can tailor them
with stainless steel or galvanized steel tops. The lower framework is
available in galvanized or stainless steel. We can provide metal feet or
threaded adjustable feet. Different height backsplash can be made and
added as needed. Please call for Pricing.
30” x 90” stainless steel top,
10” deep dual bowl,
faucet & strainer set, and
galvanized lower shelf
474
800-325-3055
Catalog
NumberPrice
25-6250-1
Hi-low Light Mobile Bench
25-6252-1
25-6256-1
Optional Lower Shelf
Single Bowl Sink
16” x 21” x 6.5” deep
*Truck ship only, shipped FOB KS,
crating charge may apply.
Description
Galvanized Top Work Table
*30” Tall *30” Tall/ Stainless Steel Bowl *36” Tall
*36” Tall / Stainless Steel Bowl
Stainless Steel Top Work Table
*30” Tall *30” Tall / Stainless Steel Bowl
*36” Tall *36” Tall / Stainless Steel Bowl
34” Tall ADA Compliant
Stainless Top
Stainless Top with Sink Options
24”x 54”x1¼” Galvanized Steel Lower Shelf
Faucet and Strainer Set
Mobile Potting Bench
30” x 60” and 30” x 90”
stainless steel top,
bolt on backsplash,
10” deep dual bowl, Featuring a stainless steel top and side panels, the Mobile Potting Bench
is designed to last for years. A 30” x 60” SS top is surrounded on the
and galvanized
back and sides with a 12” tall SS panel to hold dirt other items from
lower shelf
falling. The 36” high work surface reduces back strain and the 5” swivel
casters (2 with brakes) make it possible to move it closer to the work
area. The bench includes a galvanized steel shelf that is 24” x 54” for
additional storage.
*Mobile Potting Bench 139 lbs
25-6290-1 $ —
www.hummert.com
Greenhouse Benches
Made
in the
USA
Please specify one of the following when ordering so that we
include the correct mounting kit with your order.
1) Benches are to be “Set in concrete”
2) Benches are to be “Free standing”
3) Benches have adjustable metal feet to be freestanding or bolted to a concrete slab
4) Benches have adjustable metal feet and concrete anchors to be bolted to a concrete slab.
*Rolling benches can only be mounting option 1 or 4
ROLLING BENCHES
Work Tables
(mounting style 1)
Call for youR custom
bench quote today!
“A” Frame Benches
FEATURES
• Benches can be ordered for • Hummert Greenhouse
STATIONARY
BENCHES
Mobile Benches
•
(mounting style 1)
•
Mobile Benches
•
•
•
•
•
•
OPTIONS
• Custom widths or lengths
are available on special
Hi-low Light Mobile Bench
order — Please allow an
•
•
C
quo all Toda
Bencte on Humy for you
•
hes.
r
m
a ben We ca ert Gre FREE
e
n ev
ch
nho
your layout to en help use
w
grow
m
ing a aximize ith
rea.
additional 2-3 weeks lead
time
• Bench tops can be covered
with flattened expanded
metal, Benchmesh, or DuraBench Ultra Plastic Tops • Optional leg heights are
available
• Optional threaded
adjustable feet allow the
benching system to be
used for ebb and flow trays,
capillary matting or for
more precise adjustment
Hummert Benches are fabricated & packaged in the Midwest for a central
shipping point to anywhere. Parts of Kansas, Missouri, Illinois, Iowa, Nebraska,
and Arkansas may qualify for Hummert Delivery with a qualifying purchase.
Flat Edge
Raised Edge
Adjustable Foot
Dura-Bench Top
Truck ship only, shipped FOB KS, crating charge may apply.
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
475
Hummert greenhouse benches
Benches are constructed
with formed galvanized
steel and galvanized steel
tubing for years of growing
service
Bench capacity is 14 lbs/sq
ft evenly loaded
Standard sizes available in:
2’ length increments, 3’-4’-5’
or 6’ widths, and 30” height.
Almost any custom size is
available
Traditional, Stationary,
Rolling and Mobile Benches
can be configured with this
versatile design
Choose flat or 1½” raised
bench edging during
construction
Self-drilling, self-tapping,
and Climaseal coated (corrosion resistant) Tek
screws are used throughout
construction
Protective corners are provided for the bench top
to help prevent injury
Legs are constructed from
18 gauge galvanized steel
tubing for extra strength
and ease of installation
leg installation in a concrete pier or to sit on many
surfaces with or without a
metal foot
Cross bracing standard
on freestanding benches
(mount styles 2, 3, or 4)
Standard bench top cover
material is ¾-13 galvanized
expanded metal, other
products available by
request
Assembly required
Truck ship only. Crating
charge may apply
“A” Frame Benches
Made
in the
USA
The Single and Double “A” Frame Display designed and manufactured by Hummert International, are ideal plant merchandisers for garden centers, greenhouses and nurseries. Maximize your bench space efficiency and increase the visibility of your plant material.
Mobile Benches
Mobile Benches
Hi-low Light Mobile Bench
6’ Single “A” Frame Display
6’ Double “A” Frame Display
Both the Single and Double “A” Frame Displays feature 1” tube uprights, galvanized steel framework and two expanded metal shelves. The 30” tall “A” Frame ends are pre-assembled, with a middle and top shelf, 14” apart. Final assembly must be done on location using a drill and pop rivets.
Hummert “A” Frame Displays come standard in 6’ or 12’ lengths, but custom sizes are available.
A-frame bench & dura-bench ultra
Single “A” Frame Display: 12” wide top shelf and 24” wide bottom
shelf, approximately 14” apart with raised edges.
Length
6’
12’
Double “A” Frame Display
on Optional Hummert Bench
Double “A” Frame Display: 24” wide top shelf and
48” wide bottom shelf, approximately 14” apart with raised edges.
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Number
1-5
6 & Up
25-6206-
$ —
$—
25-6212-
—
—
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Length
Number
1-5
6 & Up
6’
25-6207-
$ —
$—
12’25-6213-
—
—
Truck ship only, shipped FOB KS, crating charge may apply.
Dura-Bench Ultra
• For a 4’ x 8’ Bench use 4, 2’ x 4’
Dura-Bench Ultra Panels
Metal Substructure
• For a 5’ x 8’ Bench use 4, 2’ x 4’
Dura-Bench Ultra Panels and
2, 1” x 4’ Panels (cut down)
Wood Substructure
8’
8’
5’
4’
The ultra in a plastic bench top
Easy to install, assembly clips prevent slippage
Strong and lightweight (4.5 lbs/panels)
High impact, abrasion resistant polypropylene
4 clips/seam
•
•
•
•
Simply fasten the
sections together
and secure to
any cross-braced
member
476
800-325-3055
4’ x 8’ Metal
Hummert Bench
with 4 Dura-Bench
Ultra panels
Description
2’ x 4’ Panels
Clips Bag of 25
Catalog PC-1PC-2PC-3
Number
1-49
50-99
100 & Up
44-4500-
$ —$ —$ —
44-4525-
—— —
Combine DuraBench Ultra panels
with a Hummert
Metal bench system or your own
substrates
Dura-Bench
Assembly Clip
Front View Back View
www.hummert.com
Mobile Benches
Made
in the
USA
Stainless Steel
Adjustable Height
& Mobile Benches
Mobile Benches
Hummert’s benches are great for research departments, harsh growing environments and germination areas. Stainless steel bench frames stand up
to wet environments, acidic chemicals and fertilizers.
• Stainless steel frame, trim and adjustment plates
• All bolts and screws are stainless steel
• 5” swivel casters, with 2 locking
• Choice of heavy duty galvanized expanded
metal top or plastic Dura-Bench top
• Adjustable height bench has 3 positions: 30”, 25½” and 21”
• Stainless steel bench frame will survive harsh
environments
Truck ship only, shipped FOB KS, crating charge may apply.
Model
Catalog Number Size
Description
Weight
Number
SSAMB 4’x8’
Adjustable Height Mobile Bench 125 lbs
25-6240-
SSMB 4’x8’
Mobile Bench
110 lbs
25-6245-
Hi-low Light Mobile Bench
3 Tier Display
PC-1
1-5
$ —
—
PC-2
6 & Up
$—
—
Big A Plant Stand
Truck ship only, shipped FOB KS,
crating charge may apply.
Model 3TD
Assembles seasonally without tools. Shelves match Hummert Benches and are covered with 3/4”-13 galvanized expanded metal. Easily
fits 42 Flats, or any other merchandise. Assembly required, but disassembles easily for compact storage.
Specifications
Truck ship only,
Top Shelf: 2’ x 6’ x 50” H
shipped FOB KS,
crating charge may apply.
Middle Shelf: 4’ x 6’ x 32” H
Bottom Shelf: 6’ x 6’ x 15” H
Overall Dimensions: 72” W x 75½” L x 55” H
Model
3TD
Description
Wt Catalog No 3 Tier Display 181 lbs 25-0205-1
Model BAPSC
Leg Extension
on BAPS
Perfect for big or cascading hanging baskets. It is available without
casters (BAPS) or with 2 locking casters (BAPSC) for mobility on a
smooth surface. No tools needed for assembly: Snap buttons are
used to lock the slip fit tubes together and wing nuts secure the top
and cross brace tubes. Easily disassembles for compact off-season
storage.
Truck ship only,
Specifications
shipped FOB KS,
crating charge may apply.
• 6 Hanging Rods
• Overall Dimensions 64” W x 72” L x 80½” H
Price
$—
Soft Foot Anti-Fatigue Matting
Model Description
Wt Catalog No Price
BAPS Big A Plant Stand
63 lbs 25-0200-1
$—
BAPSC Big A Plant Stand w/casters 67 lbs 25-0201-1
—
• Extra thick, rugged and durable closed-cell vinyl sponge anti-fatigue matting
• Improves worker morale by providing relief to aching feet and tired legs
• Black in color – 3/8” thickness
• Available in custom extra-long lengths
Weight/ Catalog PC-1PC-2
Model
Size
Mat
Number
1-9 10 & Up
2016035 3’ x 5’
12 lbs
40-6300-
$ —
$—
20160310 3’ x 10’
24 lbs
40-6302-
—
—
20160315 3’ x 15’
36 lbs 40-6304-
—
—
20160320 3’ x 20’
48 lbs
40-6306-
—
—
20160410 4’ x 10’
32 lbs 40-6308-
—
—
20160415 4’ x 15’
48 lbs 40-6310-
—
—
20160420 4’ x 20’
64 lbs 40-6312-
—
—
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
477
benches, displays & matting
Locking Caster
on BAPSC
Mobile Benches
Made
in the
USA
Mobile Bench
Deluxe Mobile Bench
Hi-low Light Mobile Bench
mobile benches & lighting
Light support with
400W Midi Reflector
(not included)
The standard mobile bench is designed for classrooms or growers that
want a rolling bench with its own light source. This galvanized rolling
bench with ¾” – 13 gauge expanded metal bench top measures 4’ x 8’.
Optional light support is available to hang metal halide, high pressure
sodium, or florescent light fixtures. The light support can also be used
to attach trellis netting for plant support. The mobile bench has 5” swivel
casters, two with locking brakes, to make rounding corners easier.
Some assembly required.
Truck ship only, shipped FOB KS, crating charge may apply.
The Deluxe Mobile Bench is set up to teach your class how to grow
with hydroponics. It’s mobility and optional light support allow it to
be used in any room with an outlet.
The 4’ x 8’ top will tilt when empty to fit through doors 35” wide. The bottom frame is divided into 2 sections. One end comes with a
piece of Dura-Bench installed. The other section is left open for the
optional 68 gallon ebb & flow tank.
Optional Ebb & Flow Kit contains: 68 gallon plastic tank with drain,
pump, fill-drain kit, tubing, and fittings. When the ebb and flow kit is
purchased with a Deluxe Mobile Bench all components will be installed in tray and plumbing connected prior to shipping.
Optional Deluxe Light Support will hold all types of lights
It is removable, and height adjustable for
different height plants, yet will still fit
through a standard doorway.
Hummert’s Deluxe
Mobile Bench in the
in-transit position
Catalog
Description
Size NumberPrice
Mobile bench 4’ x 8’ x 30” 25-6280-1
$—
Optional Light Support 36” H
25-6281-1
—
Lighting
Any of the lights below will work with the mobile benches.
For additional lighting see page 450-461
400W with Midi
Reflector
Ballast
Description
*PL 400 watt Metal Halide
*PL 400 watt High Pressure Sodium
*8’ Phyto-Light (fluorescent)
with 12’ Cord & Plug (16 x T8)
478
800-325-3055
Reflector
Catalog
NumberPrice
47-1450-1
$—
47-1481-1
—
47-0850-1
—
*
Catalog
Description
Size
NumberPrice
Deluxe Mobile Bench 4’ x 8’ x 32” 25-6285-1
$—
Deluxe Light Support 48” high
25-6282-1
—
Ebb and Flow Kit
4’ x 8’
15-1980-1
—
Truck ship only, shipped FOB KS, crating charge may apply.
www.hummert.com
Hi-low Light Mobile Bench
Made
in the
USA
Adjustable 16-Light Canopy
2 x 4 Deluxe Mobile Bench
MOBILe BENCH – MB24
• 2’x 4’ plastic ebb and flood tray included
• Serves as a growing bench or plant porter
• The frame rolls easily on 5” swivel casters for great
maneuverability, 2 casters are lockable
• Plastic mesh lower shelf
• Steel frame with powder coat finish
• Dimensions: 26.5” W x 53” L x 36” H
HYDROPONIC MOBILE BENCH – HMB24
• Complete mobile bench as above with ebb and flow kit
• Ebb and flow kit includes: 16 gallon tank, 120 volt
pump, fill/drain and overflow fittings, and connection hose
Model
MB24
HMB24
Light Kit
T-8 Wide Spectrum Bulb
T-8 Cool White
Size
2’x4’
2’x4’
4 x T8
48”
48”
800-325-3055
Weight
55
67
59
.38
.38
Catalog no
25-6278-1
25-6279-1
25-6277-1
47-1260-1
47-1049-1
Model HMB24
Price
$—
—
—
—
—
Optional Light Kit
• 36“ tall light stand
• 4 bulb light fixture
• Requires 48” T-8 bulbs
• 24’ cord with GFCI plug for safety
25-6277-1 $—
www.hummert.com
479
hi-low light mobile bench
Designed for portability and complete control over lighting levels. Light levels at the plant can be closely monitored and adjusted for
optimum results. Light housing holds 16, 32-watt T-8 bulbs. Perfect for research and germination chambers
Features
The two • Folding design permits movement through doors
photos at left
• Only 32” wide when folded for transport
are courtesy of
• 4’ x 8’ plastic ebb and flood tray in black
BASF Corp
• Light Canopy adjusts from 12” to 42” above surface
• Electric push button or hand crank actuated height control
• Aluminum light housing dissipates heat
• Holds 16, 48” T-8 bulbs 32 watt, bulbs sold separately
• 2 light levels: 8 or 16 bulbs, GFCI cord end
• 4 – 8” swivel casters (2-locking) for extreme maneuverability
Model
Size
Weight
Catalog no
Price
• 2 Lower storage areas are 24” X 33”
4’x8’
396
25-6286-1
$—
* HLMB-Crank
• Overall Dimensions: 48” W x 111” L x 36” H to top of tray
405
25-6287-1
—
* HLMB-120 Volt 4’x8’
Optional
Ebb & Flow Kit 4’x8’
55
15-1980-1
—
• Ebb and flow kit includes: 68 gallon tank, 120 volt pump, fill/drain
T-8 Wide and overflow fittings, and connection hose
Spectrum Bulb
48”
.38
47-1260-1
—
• Wide spectrum bulb- CRI 89- 3400 degree Kelvin temp
T-8 Cool White
48”
.38
47-1049-1
—
• Cool white - “every day bulb”, strong in violet, blue, and yellow
*Bulbs not included
Aluminum Ebb & Flow
Modular Benching
Common Features for all Orlandelli Benches
• Orlandelli Benches are all aluminum construction with premium alloy components, with a satin finish.
• Benches have rounded corners and bench tops.
• Benches are designed with the ebb and flow system of watering.
• Each bench comes with a slotted filter and ¼ turn valve with a fitting
for attaching to a 5/8” drain hose, if utilized.
• All legs are adjustable; please see specific height adjustments on
each bench.
• Each bench comes with a solid top, sturdy, 2.5” high, UV polystyrene tray.
• All bench tops are assembled, other than the LCM & LCL models.
• The ebb and flow system keeps water off the floors.
• After watering or sub-irrigating, each tray can be drained in to a
drain or reservoir
• Automatic watering can be accomplished with pumps, reservoir,
solenoid and timer; or manual on/off
• All wheeled benches are provided with 2 swivel and 2 lockable
wheels
• Bolts and wing nuts are provided for easy assembly with pre-drilled
legs and illustrated instructions
• Orlandelli Benches provide the look of quality and enhance the appearance of plant material, setting a standard of excellence
• Nominal sizes are indicated throughout
Rolling and Stationary Benches
PAW & PA Models
• The PA model bench tops are pre-assembled, leaving only the
legs needing to be installed using wing nuts
• Rolling Benches (PAW models) are “push button” adjustable in 4 2.5” increments; PA model is adjustable up to 3”
• Height, 32” with wheels, 30” without.
• Three bench sizes: 3.3’ x 6.8’ (41” x 81”), 4’ x 8.3’ (48” x 100”)
and 5.3’ x 10’ (63” x 119”), with 30” height
Bench
Size (nominal)
Wt
Lbs
Catalog
Number
PC - 1
1- 9
Rolling Bench
PAW Model
PC - 2
10 & up
Orlandelli aluminum benches
PAW Model, with wheels, 32” height
PAW3, 3.3’ x 6.8’ 80
PAW4, 4’ x 8.3’ 85
PAW5, 5.3’ x 10’ 93
44-4630-
44-4634-
44-4638-
$ —
—
—
$—
—
—
PA Model, without wheels, 30” height
PA5, 5.3’ x 10’
84
44-4620-
$ —
$—
See page 483 for
optional
Basket Hanger
Stationary Bench
PA Model
Stationary Benches
LCM & LCL Models
Standard
Height:
30”
Medium
Height:22”
Three Bench Heights
Low Bench, 14” height
Medium Bench, 22” height
Large Bench, 30” height
In Two Bench Sizes
Medium Bench, 3.3’ x 6.8’
Large Bench, 4’ x 8.3’
• Excellent value with quality construction throughout
• Two bench sizes: 3.3’ x 6.8’ (41” x 81”) and 4’ x 8.3’ (48” x 100”),
each available with three heights (14”, 22” and 30”)
• The ebb and flow system, keeps water off the sales floor
• Each tray can be drained after watering or sub-irrigating to a drain
or reservoir; or automated
• Each leg can be adjusted (up to 3”) for a leveled system or sloped
for added drainage
• Assembly would be required for bench tops and legs; wing nuts
and bolts are provided for easy assembly and illustrated instructions.
480
800-325-3055
See page
483 for
Raised
Bench
Low
Height:
14”
Bench
Height
Wt
Lbs
Catalog
Number
PC - 1
1- 9
PC - 2
10 & up
LCM Model, Medium Bench - 3.3’ x 6.8’ (41” x 81”)
LCM14, Low, 14” 36
LCM22, Med, 22” 47
LCM30, Std, 30” 51
44-4590-
44-4592-
44-4594-
$ —
—
—
$—
—
—
LCL Model, Large Bench - 4’ x 8.3’ (48” x 100”)
LCL14, Low, 14”
47
LCL22, Med,, 22” 57
61
LCL30, Std, 30”
44-4612-
44-4614-
44-4616-
$ —
—
—
$—
—
—
All products this page must be shipped by truck.
Crating charge will apply
www.hummert.com
Aluminum Ebb & Flow
Modular Benching
See previous page for the Common Features for all Orlandelli Benches
Rolling Island Bench Display - IBD3 Model
• The Island Bench provides the advantage of displaying taller
plants on the bottom shelves and shorter plants on the top
shelf
• The two bottom benches are 1.5’ x 6.8’ (18” x 81”); one top
bench, 3’ x 6.8” (34.4” x 81”)
• Supplied with 2 swivel and lockable wheels and 2 fixed
• Easy to position the bench in the best location
• The Island Display measures W 4.6’ x L 6.8’ x H 3’
• Bench tops easily assemble to supports with bolts and wing
nuts
Rolling Island Bench Display with 3 benches
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Model
Wt
Number
1-5
6 & up
IBD3 model
87 lbs
44-4648-1 $
—
$
—
Rolling Wall Benches - WB8 & WB10 Models
Rolling Wall Benches
Model Weight
Catalog
Number
PC-1
1-5
WB8 model
90 lbs
44-4640-1 $
—
WB10 model 100 lbs
44-4644-1
—
PC-2
6 & up
$—
—
Hexagon Rolling
Benches
&- HBD2
Hexagon
Rolling- HBS1
Benches
HBS1 &Models
HBD2 Models
• No doubt these are one of the most unique
benches on the market, providing a look of
distinction and class
• Each bench starts at a height of 22” and can
be adjusted into 4 heights above in 2.5” increments
• The 2 tier hexagon bench provides additional
sales/display area and is 2’ above the larger
bench surface
• Supplied with 2 swivel casters and 2 lockable
wheels
• Bench tops easily assemble to supports with
bolts and wing nuts
HBS1 Model
Two Tier
HBD2 Model
2.0
’
3.8’
Hexagon Rolling Bench
Model Weight
3.3’
HBS1 model
HBD2 model
44 lbs
55 lbs
Catalog
Number
44-4650-1 $
44-4652-1
PC-1 PC-2
1-5
6 & up
—
—
$—
—
All products this page must be shipped by truck. Crating charge will apply
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
481
Orlandelli aluminum benches
• This is an excellent benching system to display plant material against a
building or wall with a look of excellence
• Easy to roll in and out, moving many plants at one time with minimal labor
• Two models available; WB8 model: length 8.3’ (99.4”) x width 2.8’ (33.5”), height 5’ (59”); WB10 model: length 10’ (119”) x width 2.8’ (33.5”) x height 5’ (59”)
• Each bench measures 1.5’ wide (18.3”)
• Supplied with 2 swivel casters and 2 lockable wheels
• The top bench can be installed in a tilted position to easily display plant
material
• Bench tops easily assembles to supports with bolts and wing nuts
Cabriolet Rolling & Tilting Display
with 4 Shelves - CRD4 Model
• One of the most unique plant carts on the market
• It doubles as a plant mover and a display rack
• Four ABS green watering trays with no holes are included
• All 4 shelves on the Cabriolet Plant Display can be tilted into 5 different positions, by simply pulling on an attachment and tilting the
shelves to your desired inclination
• An optional Cabriolet Canopy (CC model) can be quickly installed
to give the cart a European look and shading plants
• The measurements of the Cabriolet are:
In the vertical closed position; length 4.5’, width 1.9’, height 5.5’. In the full tilting position; length 4.5’, width 4.2’, height 5.2’
• Supplied with 2 swivel casters and 2 lockable wheels
Cabriolet in the
vertical position
Cabriolet in the tilted position
with the optional Canopy
Orlandelli tilting display
ABS Watering Trays - WT Model
Size:
Width: 22” Length: 50”
Height: 1.8”
• The tray is designed with unique peaks and valleys, as picture of,
for added strength and drainage
• Made from ABS plastic for strength and to provide the shiny
smooth surface
• The trays are manufactured with no holes
• The Trays are available in Green, White and Black
• Weight each, 6 lbs
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Model
Color
Number
Each
Case of 15
WTG Model
Green
14-0140-1
$ —
$—
WTW Model
White
14-0142-1
—
—
WTB Model
Black
14-0144-1
—
—
All products this page must be shipped by truck.
Crating charge will apply
482
800-325-3055
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Model Weight
Number
1-9
10 & up
CRD4 model
174 lbs 44-4680-1
$ —
$—
CC model
20 lbs 44-4686-1
—
—
Optional Canopy
Universal Cabriolet Frame Kit
• The Universal Cabriolet Frame Kit is designed
to convert the universal standard plant carts
into a Cabriolet style cart with tilting shelves as
described above
• To install, simply remove the sides of the standard plant cart and “plug” in the Cabriolet Frame
Kit
• Completely galvanized; cart and shelves are not
included
• Two sides are in the kit and each measure 22.3”
(565mm) wide and 60.1” (1525mm) high
• Kit weight: 57 lbs
UCFK Model Cabriolet Frame 44-4690-1
1-9
44-4690-2 10 & up
$—
—
Universal Cabriolet Base
• The Universal Cabriolet Base is
to be used with the Frame Kit
above
• It is a very strongly built product
weighing 45 lbs.
• Once the frame kit is in positioned, shelves may be added; or simply use the standard
universal frames with shelves.
• Made of marine multilayer plywood, hot dipped galvanized framework, with 2 nylon swivel casters and 2 with brakes.
• Size: length 4.5’, width 1.9’
UCB Model Cabriolet Base
44-4602-1
1-9
44-4602-2 10 & up
www.hummert.com
$—
—
Raised Aluminum Bench
Aluminum Basket Hanger
Two Lengths Available: 6.8’ & 8.3’
Kareta Bicyle Display
• The Kareta Bicycle Display
offers a totally unique
design with the European look
• This display actually
works; the cart can be
driven
European Cart With Canopy
• Simple design with
a white frame and a
canopy for shade and
to give the cart the
European look
• Large wheels make
moving easy whether
used inside or outside
• 2 green ABS Water
Trays are included
with cart
• Trays measure 22” x
50”
• Length 4.5’, width
2.5’ and height 7’
• Shipping Weight:
70 lbs
Orlandelli displays
• Manufactured from premium alloy aluminum for strength and appearance
• Designed for Orlandelli Benches with sizes of 3.3’ x 6.8’ (40” x 81”)
and 4’ x 8.3’ (48” x 100”)
• Easy to assemble and install with the wing nuts provided
• Height is adjustable in 3 - 8” increments, with the top hanger
starting at a height of 4’4”. The middle support is 3’ above bench
height
• The channel base is 36” and is anchored with two screws on the
bench top
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Model Weight
Number
1-9
10 & up
ABH6 - 6.8’
28 lbs
44-4660-1 $ —
$—
32 lbs
44-4662-1
—
—
ABH8 - 8.3’
• Manufactured from premium alloy aluminum for strength and appearance
• Designed for the Orlandelli Benches with sizes of 3.3’ x 6.8’ (40” x
81”) and 4’ x 8.3’ (48” x 100”)
• Easy to install with wing nuts
• The height is 2’; width on model RAB6 is 1½’; on model RAB8 the
width is 2¼’
• The channel base is 2’ long and is anchored with two screws to the
bench top
Catalog PC-1 PC-2
Model
Number
1-9
10 & up
RAB6 Raised Bench - 6.8’ L 44-4666-1
$ —
$—
RAB8 Raised Bench - 8.3’ L 44-4668-1
—
—
ECC Model - with canopy
44-4694-1 1 - 5 $
44-4694-2 6 & up
—
—
Floral Display Stand
with 3 White Vases
A Bicycle
Built for
Flowers
• The steel structure is powder
coated in ivory, also with
reinforced steering
• The display has a PVC green and white canopy
• The cart has two trays for displaying plants or product
• Size: length 8.6’; width 3.5’; height 8’
• Shipping Weight, 160 lbs
KBD Model - with canopy
44-4698-1$ —
800-325-3055
• Designed for cut flower display
and sales
• Each vase holds a little more than
2½ gallons (10 liters)
• Three different heights provides
better visibility for shorter and
longer stem flowers • Frame work and buckets are white
• Size is roughly 2’ square by 3’ tall
• Weight, 19 lbs
Model
FDSW Model, White
Catalog PC-1 PC-2
Number
1-9
10 & up
56-3102-1
$ —
www.hummert.com
$—
483
Mega Cut Flower Display
with 13 Vases
• White painted frame with 13 vases
• Each vase holds 1 gallon of water
• Overall height is 4.5’
• The base sits on 4 casters for easy store
placement
• The diameter is a little more than 2’
• Weight, 12 lbs
Floral Display Stand with 3
Vases & Sign Holder
• Powder coated black frame with plastic
vases and price holder
• Each bucket holds a little more than 2½
gallons (10 liters)
• The Frame holds the Vases, each with a
8.3” x 11.7” sign holder
• The total height of the display is 5’
• Weight, 8 lbs
MCFD Model Display Stand
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Number
1-9
10 & up
56-3106-1 $ —
FDS3S Model Display Stand
Display Sign &
Product Stand
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Number
1-9
10 & up
56-3100-1 $ —
$—
• A unique stand for impulse sales; the sign
can be used to promote the products displayed on the shelf
• Heavy duty steel construction, powder
coated with a green varnish
• Sign holder measures 8.3” x 11.7”
• Ideal for displaying and selling companion
products
• Stand measures 1.5’ sq and 4’ tall
• Weight, 26 lbs
Adjustable Sign Holder
• An economical and attractive sign holder
• The sign holder can accommodate printed
stock measuring up to 8.3” x 11.7”
• Adjustable from 34” to 53”
ASH3 Model - 34” - 53”
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Number
1-9
10 & up
49-7704-1 $ —
$—
DSP Model Display Stand
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Number
1-9
10 & up
$—
49-7700-1 $ —
$—
display signs, & benches
Heavy Duty Benches
Our Heavy Duty Benches bolt together to make a strong foundation for large planters,
ceramic pots, or Dyna-Green™ fertilizer. • The plastic top panels are supported every
12” down the length of the bench
• The frame is constructed from CNC
punched and brake formed galvanized
metal
• The 12 gauge galvanized steel frame is
bolted together with stainless bolts • There is no edge rail to have to lift pots
over, making for a very clean looking bench
• Legs have a bent foot with a hole for anchoring the bench to the floor
• Weight capacity 35 pounds per square foot
• 30” standard height; other heights available, please inquire
• 6’ and 8’ benches have 4 legs while the 10’
and 12’ benches have 6 legs
Once bolted together they can be moved from place to place. The stainless steel assembly hardware allows for teardown and reassembly anytime.
Size
3’ x 6’
3’ x 8’
3’ x 10’
3’ x 12’
4’ x 6’
4’ x 8’
4’ x 10’
4’ x 12’
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Number
1-9
10 & up
25-4950-
$ —
$—
25-4952-
—
—
25-4954-
—
—
25-4956-
—
—
25-4960-
$ —
$—
25-4962-
—
—
25-4964-
—
—
25-4966-
—
—
Our bench held 880 lbs
of Dyna-Green Fertilizer
37 lbs per sq. ft
Truck ship only
484
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
A-V Bench Systems
A-V Bench Systems are designed to last. The sleek,
modern design of A-V Benches is ideal for commercial production use, as well as retail garden
centers, educational or research applications
• 20,000 psi fiberglass bench frames — are stronger,
lighter and more durable than wood
• Fiberglass bench frames and UV protected polypropylene bench tops that resist weathering, will not
rust or decay and are corrosion resistant
• A-V Bench tops – are easy to clean and disinfect
Inhibits mold and fungus growth
• Modular, interlocking 18” x 36” and 24” x 48” bench
tops that are adaptable to any size bench configuration and can accommodate tubular heating systems
• A-V Bench tops are durable and lightweight, No sagging when properly supported.
• A-V Bench tops install on any type of bench frames
with screws or pop rivets
• Flats, plugs trays and pots slide easily over the
bench surface
• A-V Benches are designed with optional fixed or
removable legs for compact storage
• A-V Bench Systems are versatile, designed for stationary, rolling, Multi-Tier display use, and rolling
cart applications
• All benches are orange in color
Stationary Bench System With 30” Legs
With Fixed Legs With Removable Legs
# of
Part No
Size
Legs Catalog No
Price
Catalog No
Price
BT360723’x6’444-4000-1 $ —
44-4001-1 $ —
BT361083’x9’444-4002-1
—
44-4003-1
—
BT36144
3’x12’444-4004-1
—
44-4005-1
—
BT720726’x6’444-4014-1
—
44-4015-1
—
BT721086’x9’444-4016-1
—
44-4017-1
—
BT72144
6’x12’444-4018-1
—
44-4019-1
—
Part No
Size
Legs Catalog No
Price
Catalog No
Price
BT480724’x6’444-4006-1 $ —
44-4007-1 $—
BT480964’x8’644-4008-1
—
44-4009-1
—
BT48120
4’x10’644-4010-1
—
44-4011-1
—
BT48144
4’x12’644-4012-1
—
44-4013-1
—
BT96144
8’x12’944-4020-1
—
44-4021-1
—
Assembly is required.
A-V bench systems
Rolling benches
Retrofit existing benches
Display benches
Rolling Bench System With 30” Legs
Leg Bracing
A-V Bench Top Only
Catalog Price per
Size
Number
Lin Ft
6’ wide; less than 24’ long 44-4030-1
$—
6’ wide; over 24’ long 44-4032-1
—
For benches taller than 30”, or heavy
to excessive loads per square foot.
Size Catalog No Price
18” x 36” x 9/16” 44-4060-1 $—
24” x 48” x 7/8”44-4062-1
—
Catalog No Price Per Bench
44-4029-1
$—
Three-Tier Stairstep Display Bench
Size
6’ L x 3’ W x 4’ H
12’ L x 3’ W x 4’ H
Bench Only
Basket Rail
Cat No
Price
Cat No
Price
44-4040-1
$ — 44-4041-1
$ —
44-4046-1
— 44-4047-1
—
Contact Hummert’s Greenhouse Department for further information and quantity pricing on standard
and custom A-V Benches!
800-325-3055
Swivel Casters
Cat No
Price
44-4042-1
$ —
44-4048-1
—
Full Tops Cat No
Price
44-4043-1
$—
44-4049-1
—
SHIPPED FOB:
Virginia
www.hummert.com
485
Discover the Plant-Friendly
Nature of Benchmaster Plastic
Benching Systems
Single Level Tables
• No metal parts to rust, no wooden parts to rot, and no place for insects or fungus to
burrow and grow
• Molded with a heavy duty UV resistant, recycled plastic
• These benches will look great and last for years
• Solid top benches are available as special order only, call for pricing and sizes
• Free layout and design services available
• Can be stored indoors or out
# Legs
Size
Needed Wt
Grid Top Benches
*16” x 8’
8
19
2’ x 3’
4
10.5
2’ x 4’
4
14
2’ x 5’6”
6
18
*2’ x 8’
8
27
*3’ x 8’
11
42
Bench Master Legs
4” .3
12” .5
18” .8
24” 1.08
30” 1.36
36” 1.65
*Truck ship only
Catalog
Number
PC-1
1-24
PC-2
PC-3
25-99 100 & Up
44-3770-
44-3680-
44-3682-
44-3685-
44-3700-
44-3710-
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
44-3544-
44-3720-
44-3718-
44-3725-
44-3726-
44-3727-
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
$ —
—
—
—
—
—
$—
—
—
—
—
—
$—
—
—
—
—
—
3-Step Plant Hanger Plus
TM
Benchmaster display tables
• Spotlight product and maximize selling space with tiered and hanging plant combo
• Extremely durable, easy, no-tool assembly, saves time and money
• Add the “New” WaterbedTM - A self watering plant display system that increases live
good margins, minimizes shrink and improves plant quality
• Perfect to display tropicals, bedding plants and hanging baskets all in one display
DUAL SIDED PLANT HANGER PLUS
SINGLE SIDED PLANT
HANGER Plus
SHIPPED FOB:
Michigan
Size
Catalog No.Price
Single Sided Plant Hanger Plus
96”L x 39”W 44-3800-1
$
66”L x 39”W 44-3801-1
36”L x 39”W 44-3802-1
Dual Sided Plant Hanger Plus
96”L x 63”W 44-3804-1
$
66”L x 63”W 44-3805-1
36”L x 63”W 44-3806-1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Optional Accessories
Leg Stacker
Used to stack benches
on top of another
44-3731-1Each
$—
44-3808-1Each
486
4” Casters with or without
Bucket & Ring
brake
Sign Kit
7” diameter x 1’ H
Used to make select units
Snap onto any bench
bucket that fits into
mobile but not recommended
master leg
any bench master leg
for much weight
Holds 11” x 7” card stock
Set of 5
With brake
44-3738-1Each
$—
44-3736-1Each
$—
44-3809-1Each
$
—
Without brake
$—
44-3735-1Each
$—
37” Caster Bar
Used to make almost
any tiered unit mobile
30” also available as
special order
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
Multi-Level Tables
• Any configuration available!
• See accessories for all bench systems on previous page to maximize the use
Classic 3-Step Wall Display
2-Tiered Round
End Cap
5-Step Pyramid
SHIPPED FOB:
Waterbed
TM
Michigan
A Self-Watering Plant Display System
BENCHMASTER
®
by
All Plastic Display Systems
To retrofit your
existing display with
the water bed call for
more information
• 2-1/2 gallon water capacity
• Designed to work with your current Benchmaster displays, but will also work with most other benching or display systems
• Capable of reducing water use by more than 50%
• Keeps contained fertilizer and prevents runoff
• Dramatically reduces water on floors and down the drain
• 24” x 48” reservoir is molded from 100% recycled HDPE
• Stop wasting water, start saving money!
44-3754-11-9$ —
44-3754-2 10 & up
—
800-325-3055
SHIPPED FOB:
Michigan
www.hummert.com
487
Benchmaster tables & waterbed
Catalog
Model
Size
NumberPrice
Classic 3-Step Wall Display
$—
SM363603W 36” L x 39” W 44-3810-
—
SM663603W 36” L x 39” W 44-3811-
SM963603W 36” L x 39” W 44-3812-
—
5-Step Pyramid
SM363605P
36” L x 63” W 44-3816-
$—
66” L x 63” W 44-3817-
—
SM663605P
SM963605P
96” L x 63” W 44-3818-
—
2-Tiered Round End Cap
BR482402E
48” W x 24” H 44-3820-
$—
60” W x 24” H 44-3822-
—
BR602402E
3-Tiered Round with Plant Hanger
BR484503TP 48” W x 81” H 44-3830-
$—
—
BR604503TP 60” W x 81” H 44-3832-
3-Tiered Round
with Plant Hanger
Plant Displays
Double
Tri-Step
Display
Tri-Step
Display
Poly-tex plant displays
• Shelf depth reduces gradually from 36” to 24” to 18” for improved
product placement and visual appeal
• Expanded metal bench tops
No tools required
Specifications:
for assembly!
Construction: Galvanized steel
Capacity: (24) 1020-style flats per 6’ section
Optional 47/5” high double purlin holds (12) 10” hanging baskets
per 6’ section
Base Dimensions: 73.25” W x 40” D x 44.5” H
Options:
• Hanging basket purlin can be powder coated in black, red or emerald green all for even greater visual range
Catalog
Model
Description NumberPrice
PX7020
Single Unit
44-2250-1
$—
PX7020-XT6
6’ Extension
44-2252-1
—
PX7020-P
Single Unit
44-2254-1
—
w/ HB Purlin
PX7020-XT6P
6’ Extension
44-2256-1
—
w/ HB Purlin
How do the extensions work?
Beginning with the base model, the patented shared-end support
system easily creates extended, money-saving benching runs. Splitting connected runs may require additional components.
• Featuring the “stepped” shelf depth (from 36” to 24” to 18”), this
unit offers you visual appeal for your customers.
• The patented shared end support connecting systems allows you
to create aisles of color
• You’ll appreciate the tool-free assembly and galvanized steel construction
• Choose a configuration with double hanging basket purlins for
more display space
• Expanded metal bench tops
No tools required
Specifications:
for assembly!
Construction: Galvanized steel
Capacity: (48) 1020-style flats per 6’ section
Optional 48” high double basket purlin holds (24) 10” hanging
baskets
Base Dimensions: 73.25” W x 75.5” D x 44.5” H
Options:
• Double hanging basket purlin can be powder coated in black, red
or emerald green
Catalog
Model
Description NumberPrice
PX7021
Single Unit
44-2258-1
$—
PX7021-XT6
6’ Extension
44-2260-1
—
PX7021-P
Single Unit
44-2262-1
—
w/ HB Purlin
PX7021-XT6P
6’ Extension
44-2264-1
—
w/ HB Purlin
All products on this
page are:
SHIPPED FOB:
Minnesota
2 & 3 Tier Displays
• Expanded metal bench tops are standard with
both models
• Optional heavy duty swivel-locking casters and
hanging basket purlin are available as well as
powder coating in black, red or emerald green
• Please inquire for pricing
No tools required
for assembly!
Catalog
Model
DescriptionNumber Price
PX7030
Single Unit 44-2266-1
$—
PX7030-XT6 6’ Extension 44-2268-1
—
PX7032
Single Unit 44-2270-1
—
PX7032-XT6 6’ Extension 44-2272-1
—
488
800-325-3055
www.hummert.com
Galvanized Expanded Metal
Standard Expanded Metal
Size
Weight
3’ x 4’
12 lb
3’ x 6’
15 lb
3’ x 8’
19 lb
4’ x 4’
13 lb
4’ x 6’
20 lb
26 lb
4’ x 8’
18 lb
5’ x 4’
25 lb
5’ x 6’
6’ x 4’
20 lb
30 lb
6’ x 6’
• Galvanized Expanded Metal for Greenhouse Benches, Trays and Carts is the most versatile growing
surface available
• It’s diamond shaped openings allow excellent air circulation for heating and ventilation while maintaining good drainage
• The Hot-Dip Galvanized finish provides an effective and long term deterrent to corrosion
• 13-gauge carbon steel base material, with a 3/4” diamond
Standard
• Comes in both standard and flattened styles
• Sizes below in stock for immediate shipment
• Bench frame and/or aluminum extrusions not included
• For a quote on flattened style please call for more information
CatalogPC-1 PC-2
Number
1-9
10 & Up
44-3203-
$ —$ —
44-3193-
—
—
44-3197-
—
—
44-3201-
—
—
44-3194-
— —
44-3198-
— —
44-3199-
— —
44-3195-
—
—
44-3202-
— —
44-3196-
— —
Flattened
Standard Expanded Metal must be supported every
24” on center
Truck ship only Crating Charge may apply
Chrome Plated Wire Shelving
• Post are numbered around diameter in 1” increments
• Weight capacity per shelf is 600 lbs
* indicates 500 lbs per shelf
• Optional shelf edges are available in 18” - 72”
lengths, call for prices
• Begin with “Free-Standing” units and then
“Add-on” additional units either on end or sides
• Optional Rubber or Poly Casters are available,
2 are with brakes and 2 without
FREE-STANDING SHELVING UNITS
• Each unit consists of 4 posts, 4 shelves and 16
post sleeves that secure shelves to the post
ADD-ON SHELVING UNITS
• Each unit consists of 2 posts, 4 shelves, 8 “S”
hooks and 8 post sleeves that secure shelves
to the post
• “S” hooks attach Add-on shelving to existing
shelving units
Size WtCatalog
Model
DxW
Lb
Number
Price
FREE-STANDING UNITS - 74” HEIGHT
272641 18”x36” 62
50-4000-1
$—
27270418”x48” 71 50-4002-1
—
27270718”x60” 80 50-4004-1
—
—
* 27271018”x72” 98 50-4006-1
27264424”x36” 84 50-4008-1
—
27271324”x48” 92 50-4010-1
—
27271624”x60”112 50-4012-1
—
—
* 27271924”x72”120 50-4014-1
ADD-ON UNITS - 74” HEIGHT
272647 18”x36” 54
50-4020-1
$—
27272218”x48” 63 50-4022-1
—
27272518”x60” 72 50-4024-1
—
—
* 27272818”x72” 90 50-4026-1
27265024”x36” 56 50-4028-1
—
27273124”x48” 74 50-4030-1
—
27273424”x60” 96 50-4032-1
—
—
* 27273824”x72”110 50-4034-1
SHIPPED FOB:
Pennsylvania
800-325-3055
expanded metal & wire shelving
• Open wire design that provides maximum visibility and air circulation while minimizing dust accumulation
• Sets up easily and adjusts without tools
• Shelves adjust at 1” increments on numbered
posts
• Adjustable floor levelers compensate for surface irregularities
5” x 1.25” Stem Casters
2 with brakes and
2 without
PLEASE NOTE:
1. Shelving is also
available in 63” and
86” heights
2. Optional shelf
edges are available in
18” - 72” lengths by
3” high
SET OF 4 CASTERS FOR FREE-STANDING UNITS
Wt/Catalog PC-1 PC-2
Model Description Lb
Number
1-9
10 & up
170258 Rubber
12
50-4040-
$ —
$—
170270 Poly 1050-4042-
—
—
www.hummert.com
489
Heavy Duty Work Benches
• These heavy duty work benches serve well for light duty use such as
potting, but are also built strong and rugged so they can be used in
repairing heavy greenhouse equipment as well
• There are two styles of benches; one with fixed legs and the other
with adjustable legs from 30” to 36”
• Each bench includes a top, legs and stringer for lateral stability
• There are two tops from which to choose. The steel top is painted
gray or the tuff top which is made with an extremely hard
resin press board, sanded and sealed with a clear coating
• The bench can be accessorized with drawers, back and
end stops, lower shelf or a 12” high riser shelf
• Steel top has approx. 700 lb capacity (evenly distributed)
Steel Top
Heavy Duty Work Bench with Tuff Top
STEEL TOP
TUFF TOP
Size
ModelCatalog
PC-1PC-2ModelCatalogPC-1 PC-2
L x W x H
No Wt Number 1-9 10 & Up
No Wt Number
1-9 10 & Up
FIXED HEIGHT
48” x 28” x 30”
34320 103 50-2820-
$ —$ — 34322124 50-2830-
$ —$ —
48” x 28” x 34”
34330 106 50-2821-
—
— 34332127 50-2831-
—
—
60” x 34” x 30”
34460 129 50-2822-
—
— 34462168 50-2832-
—
—
60” x 34” x 34”
34470133 50-2823-
—
— 34472170 50-2833-
—
—
72” x 34” x 30”
34560 145 50-2824-
—
— 34562188 50-2834-
—
—
72” x 34” x 34”
34570 148 50-2825-
—
— 34572190 50-2835-
—
—
ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT - 30” - 36”
48” x 28” 34324 99 50-2826-
$ —$ — 34326120 50-2836-
$ —$ —
60” x 34” 34464 119 50-2827-
—
— 34466158 50-2837-
—
—
72” x 34”
34564 149 50-2828-
—
— 34566178 50-2838-
—
—
heavy duty benches & stools
RISER SHELF
Each riser shelf is 10” wide and 12”
above the bench top. Excellent for
extra out-of-the-way storage space.
If used with TUFF TOP, order the
hardware kit, model 31223
LOWER BENCH SHELVES
Designed to be installed in
all benches listed. Provides
additional storage area under
bench. Two shelves may be
used per bench
Model
Size CatalogPC-1 PC-2
No
L x W x H
Wt Number
1-9
10 & Up
BACK
LOWER BENCH SHELVES
& END
31110H
48” x 12”
12 50-2840-
$ —$ —
STOPS
31115H
60” x 12”
15 50-2841-
—
—
3” raised
31120H
72” x 12”
18 50-2842-
—
—
edge preBACK AND END STOPS
vents media
30976
48” x 28”
9 50-2845-
$ —$ —
or items
30987
60” x 34”
11 50-2846-
—
— from falling off the edge of bench.
30988
72” x 34”
1250-2847-
—
— If used with TUFF TOP, order the
RISER SHELF
hardware kit, model 31223.
30965
48” x 10” x 12”
18 50-2850-
$ —$ —
30966
60” x 10” x 12”
22 50-2851-
—
—
electrical
30967
72” x 10” x 12”
25 50-2852-
—
—
outlet
DRAWER AND CASE
strip
30960 15-3/4” x 20” x 6-3/4” 20 50-2855-
$ —$ —
A convenient
—
—
30962 21-3/4” x 20” x 6-3/4” 25 50-2856-
way to route
9389 Cylinder Cam Lock50-2857-
—
—
power to the
HARDWARE ACCESSORY KITS
work area.
31141 28” Drawer Channels 350-2860-
$ —$ — Outlets are 15A, 125V on 12”
—
— centers. Mounting hardware not
31143 34” Drawer Channels 4 50-2861-
31223 Hardware Kit
.3 50-2862-
—
— included.
9371 60” Long/5 Outlets
3 50-2863-
—
—
DRAWER AND CASE
Provides extra storage for
tools, pruners, and other small
items. Optional lock available
and is field installed. Order the
Drawer Channel kit if installed
under the steel top. Order the
hardware kit if installed under
the TUFF TOP.
FIXED
HEIGHT LEGS
Designed for
surface height of
approximately
30” or 34”. Call
for more information on rolling
bench option.
ADJUSTABLE
HEIGHT LEGS
Adjustable height
legs offer surface
height of approximately 30” to 36”
high.
All-Purpose Stool
- With Adjustable Legs - 24” to 32”
• Designed to fit almost every job requirement
• They are adjustable from 24” to 32” with 8 height adjustments of 1” each
• The legs are constructed with heavy gauge steel tubing and have swiveled plated steel glides which distribute weight evenly
• The optional adjustable backrest can be attached to the All-Purpose Stool
• For added comfort, optional slip-on cushions are available for covering
the backrest and the seat. Color; gray
SHIPPED FOB:
North Carolina
490
Model
Catalog
PC-1 PC-2
No Description
WtNumber Each Case of 2
9316 24” to 32” Stool 12 50-2865-
$ —$—
9336Backrest
6 50-2866-
—
—
9314 Backrest Cushion .5
50-2867-
——
9315 Seat Cushion
1
50-2868-
——
800-325-3055
All-purpose stools, with
backrest, backrest cushion
and seat cushion
www.hummert.com
Gorilla Rack Work Bench/
Potting Bench
A well designed work bench or potting bench to provide a convenient set-up
to organize tools, fertilizer, chemicals, etc. It is sturdy in construction weighing over 111 lbs yet can be easily moved to other areas.
Two-Way Cantilever Shelf: Can be installed as a shelf or tray style. 9” x 60”
Pegboard Back Panel: Conveniently used as a tool organizer. 24” x 60”
Work Surface: Made of 3/8” particle board. 24” x 60”
Full Width Tool Drawer: Full width and depth, flat design allows more visible tool arrangement. 18” x 56”
• Bottom Storage Shelf: Full width and depth, bottom storage shelf has
wrap-around edge to prevent items from falling off edge of shelf. 24” x 60”
• The fiberboard supplied is unfinished and is ready
to be stained, sealed or painted, which is recommended if used in a wet environment
• Boltless post design: Ball bearing glides for easy
assembly
• Dimensions: 24” x 60” x 60”
•
•
•
•
GR2102
40-6275-1
40-6275-2
1 - 4
5 & up
$—
—
Gorilla Rack Storage Shelves/
Workbenches
• Bolt-Less Construction: Z-Beams lock into angle posts with ball
bearing glides for easy assembly
• Heavy Duty Components: Manufactured from 16 gauge steel
• May Be Assembled In 3 Ways: 1) As a Work bench - 72” W x 18”
D x 36” H; 2) As a Storage Shelf - 36” W x 18” D x 72” H; 3) As a
Work Table - 36” W x 36” D x 36” H
• Shelving: Made of 3/8” particle board
• Weight: 80 lbs and can hold up to 750 lbs/shelf
GRZ6-3618-5B
40-6270-11-9
40-6270-2
10 & up
$—
—
800-325-3055
• Ideal for using as a rolling chair
for potting, propagation or transplanting
• The chair is based on 5 swivel
wheels for added stability and has
a pan under the seat for storing
pruning or planting tools
• The seat is a soft foamed polyurethane and is 13.5” in diameter
• It pneumatically adjusts in height
from 15” to 20” and weighs only
15 lbs.
WLPS -2
50-2875-1 1 - 5
50-2875-2 6 & up
SHIPPED FOB:
Poly-tex display fixtures
Black
powder
coat finish
Rolling Potting Chair
$—
—
Indiana
Shopping Cart
•These are the best quality shopping carts a garden center or
nursery can provide for their
customers to use
•This is a special order product
with an extended delivery time •Please call for prices; minimum
order is 20 carts
www.hummert.com
491
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement